WO2019139136A1 - Laminated body - Google Patents
Laminated body Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2019139136A1 WO2019139136A1 PCT/JP2019/000745 JP2019000745W WO2019139136A1 WO 2019139136 A1 WO2019139136 A1 WO 2019139136A1 JP 2019000745 W JP2019000745 W JP 2019000745W WO 2019139136 A1 WO2019139136 A1 WO 2019139136A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- convex
- layer
- laminate
- portions
- curved
- Prior art date
Links
- 239000000463 material Substances 0.000 claims abstract description 44
- 239000011521 glass Substances 0.000 claims description 118
- 229920005989 resin Polymers 0.000 claims description 67
- 239000011347 resin Substances 0.000 claims description 67
- 239000000758 substrate Substances 0.000 claims description 51
- 238000005452 bending Methods 0.000 claims description 23
- 238000005034 decoration Methods 0.000 claims description 22
- 229910052751 metal Inorganic materials 0.000 claims description 11
- 239000002184 metal Substances 0.000 claims description 11
- 229910010413 TiO 2 Inorganic materials 0.000 claims description 4
- 229910052782 aluminium Inorganic materials 0.000 claims description 2
- 238000003475 lamination Methods 0.000 claims description 2
- 229910052709 silver Inorganic materials 0.000 claims description 2
- 238000013461 design Methods 0.000 abstract description 16
- 239000010410 layer Substances 0.000 description 309
- 239000010408 film Substances 0.000 description 64
- 238000007639 printing Methods 0.000 description 50
- 239000002023 wood Substances 0.000 description 28
- 230000004438 eyesight Effects 0.000 description 21
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 description 20
- 229920006289 polycarbonate film Polymers 0.000 description 15
- 239000002585 base Substances 0.000 description 11
- 239000013256 coordination polymer Substances 0.000 description 11
- 238000004544 sputter deposition Methods 0.000 description 10
- 239000002313 adhesive film Substances 0.000 description 8
- 238000010438 heat treatment Methods 0.000 description 8
- -1 polyethylene terephthalate Polymers 0.000 description 8
- JAWMENYCRQKKJY-UHFFFAOYSA-N [3-(2,4,6,7-tetrahydrotriazolo[4,5-c]pyridin-5-ylmethyl)-1-oxa-2,8-diazaspiro[4.5]dec-2-en-8-yl]-[2-[[3-(trifluoromethoxy)phenyl]methylamino]pyrimidin-5-yl]methanone Chemical compound N1N=NC=2CN(CCC=21)CC1=NOC2(C1)CCN(CC2)C(=O)C=1C=NC(=NC=1)NCC1=CC(=CC=C1)OC(F)(F)F JAWMENYCRQKKJY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- 229920000139 polyethylene terephthalate Polymers 0.000 description 5
- 239000005020 polyethylene terephthalate Substances 0.000 description 5
- 229920005992 thermoplastic resin Polymers 0.000 description 5
- VZSRBBMJRBPUNF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-(2,3-dihydro-1H-inden-2-ylamino)-N-[3-oxo-3-(2,4,6,7-tetrahydrotriazolo[4,5-c]pyridin-5-yl)propyl]pyrimidine-5-carboxamide Chemical compound C1C(CC2=CC=CC=C12)NC1=NC=C(C=N1)C(=O)NCCC(N1CC2=C(CC1)NN=N2)=O VZSRBBMJRBPUNF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- PPBRXRYQALVLMV-UHFFFAOYSA-N Styrene Chemical compound C=CC1=CC=CC=C1 PPBRXRYQALVLMV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 4
- 239000005340 laminated glass Substances 0.000 description 4
- 239000002344 surface layer Substances 0.000 description 4
- 239000000853 adhesive Substances 0.000 description 3
- 230000001070 adhesive effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000015572 biosynthetic process Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000001035 drying Methods 0.000 description 3
- 229920001971 elastomer Polymers 0.000 description 3
- 239000011229 interlayer Substances 0.000 description 3
- 239000000123 paper Substances 0.000 description 3
- 239000011295 pitch Substances 0.000 description 3
- 229920002037 poly(vinyl butyral) polymer Polymers 0.000 description 3
- 239000005060 rubber Substances 0.000 description 3
- 229920001187 thermosetting polymer Polymers 0.000 description 3
- 229920002799 BoPET Polymers 0.000 description 2
- RTZKZFJDLAIYFH-UHFFFAOYSA-N Diethyl ether Chemical compound CCOCC RTZKZFJDLAIYFH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229920000877 Melamine resin Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 239000004743 Polypropylene Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000006096 absorbing agent Substances 0.000 description 2
- NIXOWILDQLNWCW-UHFFFAOYSA-N acrylic acid group Chemical group C(C=C)(=O)O NIXOWILDQLNWCW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229920000122 acrylonitrile butadiene styrene Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 230000003666 anti-fingerprint Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000000576 coating method Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000003086 colorant Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000003822 epoxy resin Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229920000554 ionomer Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 238000004519 manufacturing process Methods 0.000 description 2
- 150000002739 metals Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 238000000465 moulding Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000005011 phenolic resin Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229920003229 poly(methyl methacrylate) Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 229920000647 polyepoxide Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 229920001155 polypropylene Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 229920001296 polysiloxane Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 238000003825 pressing Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000007650 screen-printing Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000002356 single layer Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000003746 surface roughness Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000004381 surface treatment Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000002834 transmittance Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000000007 visual effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000005406 washing Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000004925 Acrylic resin Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920000178 Acrylic resin Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229910018072 Al 2 O 3 Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- OKTJSMMVPCPJKN-UHFFFAOYSA-N Carbon Chemical compound [C] OKTJSMMVPCPJKN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- BVKZGUZCCUSVTD-UHFFFAOYSA-L Carbonate Chemical compound [O-]C([O-])=O BVKZGUZCCUSVTD-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- 229910052684 Cerium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000004641 Diallyl-phthalate Substances 0.000 description 1
- VGGSQFUCUMXWEO-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ethene Chemical compound C=C VGGSQFUCUMXWEO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- JOYRKODLDBILNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ethyl urethane Chemical compound CCOC(N)=O JOYRKODLDBILNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000005977 Ethylene Substances 0.000 description 1
- YCKRFDGAMUMZLT-UHFFFAOYSA-N Fluorine atom Chemical compound [F] YCKRFDGAMUMZLT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229920000106 Liquid crystal polymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004977 Liquid-crystal polymers (LCPs) Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000004640 Melamine resin Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052779 Neodymium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000004677 Nylon Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000004696 Poly ether ether ketone Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229930182556 Polyacetal Natural products 0.000 description 1
- 239000004962 Polyamide-imide Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000004697 Polyetherimide Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000004698 Polyethylene Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000004734 Polyphenylene sulfide Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920001328 Polyvinylidene chloride Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229910052777 Praseodymium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229910004298 SiO 2 Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229910006404 SnO 2 Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229920001807 Urea-formaldehyde Polymers 0.000 description 1
- BZHJMEDXRYGGRV-UHFFFAOYSA-N Vinyl chloride Chemical compound ClC=C BZHJMEDXRYGGRV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- DHKHKXVYLBGOIT-UHFFFAOYSA-N acetaldehyde Diethyl Acetal Natural products CCOC(C)OCC DHKHKXVYLBGOIT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000002777 acetyl group Chemical class [H]C([H])([H])C(*)=O 0.000 description 1
- 229920006397 acrylic thermoplastic Polymers 0.000 description 1
- XECAHXYUAAWDEL-UHFFFAOYSA-N acrylonitrile butadiene styrene Chemical compound C=CC=C.C=CC#N.C=CC1=CC=CC=C1 XECAHXYUAAWDEL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000004676 acrylonitrile butadiene styrene Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000000654 additive Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000000996 additive effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000003513 alkali Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920000180 alkyd Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000000956 alloy Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910045601 alloy Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 150000001408 amides Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 230000000844 anti-bacterial effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000003373 anti-fouling effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000013459 approach Methods 0.000 description 1
- QUDWYFHPNIMBFC-UHFFFAOYSA-N bis(prop-2-enyl) benzene-1,2-dicarboxylate Chemical compound C=CCOC(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1C(=O)OCC=C QUDWYFHPNIMBFC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000005388 borosilicate glass Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052799 carbon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229910052804 chromium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000011248 coating agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000004040 coloring Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229920001577 copolymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229910052802 copper Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 230000007547 defect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000000151 deposition Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000006866 deterioration Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000011161 development Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229910003460 diamond Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000010432 diamond Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000010894 electron beam technology Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000002708 enhancing effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 150000002148 esters Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 238000011156 evaluation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000001704 evaporation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000004744 fabric Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000005357 flat glass Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000005329 float glass Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052731 fluorine Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000011737 fluorine Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052733 gallium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 230000004313 glare Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229910052737 gold Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 238000007646 gravure printing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000003384 imaging method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229910052738 indium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 238000007641 inkjet printing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229910052742 iron Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 230000001788 irregular Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000010030 laminating Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229910052746 lanthanum Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000007788 liquid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052749 magnesium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229910052748 manganese Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000004579 marble Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910044991 metal oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 150000004706 metal oxides Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 239000000203 mixture Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052750 molybdenum Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000000178 monomer Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000005445 natural material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052759 nickel Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229910052758 niobium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229920001778 nylon Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 238000007645 offset printing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229910052763 palladium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 230000035699 permeability Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000000049 pigment Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052697 platinum Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229920002492 poly(sulfone) Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920006122 polyamide resin Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920002312 polyamide-imide Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920001230 polyarylate Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920001707 polybutylene terephthalate Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920005668 polycarbonate resin Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004431 polycarbonate resin Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920002530 polyetherether ketone Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920001601 polyetherimide Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920000573 polyethylene Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920013716 polyethylene resin Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920001721 polyimide Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000009719 polyimide resin Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000004926 polymethyl methacrylate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920005672 polyolefin resin Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920006324 polyoxymethylene Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920000069 polyphenylene sulfide Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920005990 polystyrene resin Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920005749 polyurethane resin Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004800 polyvinyl chloride Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920000915 polyvinyl chloride Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000005033 polyvinylidene chloride Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000002243 precursor Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000002265 prevention Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000002787 reinforcement Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000013464 silicone adhesive Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920002050 silicone resin Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000005361 soda-lime glass Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000002904 solvent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000008961 swelling Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229910052715 tantalum Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- ISXSCDLOGDJUNJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N tert-butyl prop-2-enoate Chemical compound CC(C)(C)OC(=O)C=C ISXSCDLOGDJUNJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229920001169 thermoplastic Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004416 thermosoftening plastic Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000010409 thin film Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052718 tin Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229910052719 titanium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229910052721 tungsten Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229920006337 unsaturated polyester resin Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 150000003673 urethanes Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229910052720 vanadium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000012808 vapor phase Substances 0.000 description 1
- 210000003462 vein Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 229920002554 vinyl polymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229910052727 yttrium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229910052725 zinc Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229910052726 zirconium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
Images
Classifications
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B32—LAYERED PRODUCTS
- B32B—LAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
- B32B15/00—Layered products comprising a layer of metal
- B32B15/04—Layered products comprising a layer of metal comprising metal as the main or only constituent of a layer, which is next to another layer of the same or of a different material
- B32B15/08—Layered products comprising a layer of metal comprising metal as the main or only constituent of a layer, which is next to another layer of the same or of a different material of synthetic resin
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B32—LAYERED PRODUCTS
- B32B—LAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
- B32B3/00—Layered products comprising a layer with external or internal discontinuities or unevennesses, or a layer of non-planar shape; Layered products comprising a layer having particular features of form
- B32B3/26—Layered products comprising a layer with external or internal discontinuities or unevennesses, or a layer of non-planar shape; Layered products comprising a layer having particular features of form characterised by a particular shape of the outline of the cross-section of a continuous layer; characterised by a layer with cavities or internal voids ; characterised by an apertured layer
- B32B3/30—Layered products comprising a layer with external or internal discontinuities or unevennesses, or a layer of non-planar shape; Layered products comprising a layer having particular features of form characterised by a particular shape of the outline of the cross-section of a continuous layer; characterised by a layer with cavities or internal voids ; characterised by an apertured layer characterised by a layer formed with recesses or projections, e.g. hollows, grooves, protuberances, ribs
Definitions
- the present invention relates to a laminate.
- the glass plate has high durability, a smooth surface, high designability due to texture, reflection and the like, and is widely used in buildings, interiors and the like. Furthermore, in recent years, building members such as windows, floors, walls and ceilings; interior members such as table tops; exterior materials for white goods such as washing machines and refrigerators; mobile phones, personal digital assistants (PDAs) In applications such as electronic devices, glass materials having higher designability are being sought. In the future, it is expected that the applications of glass materials with high designability will be expanded.
- Patent Document 1 discloses a laminate having a five-layer structure formed by laminating and forming a glass plate / adhesive film / a base plate backing sheet / adhesive film / glass plate (see Patent Document 1).
- the glass plate on the back side is not essential. Moreover, you may use arbitrary translucent base materials, such as a translucent resin board, instead of a glass plate. In a laminate including a translucent substrate and a design layer, more advanced design is required as the value added of various products is increased.
- This invention is made in view of the said situation, and aims at provision of the laminated body excellent in the designability conventionally.
- the laminate of the present invention is A laminate comprising: a translucent base material; and a concavo-convex layer having a plurality of convex portions in the form of lines in a plan view on the surface,
- the concavo-convex layer has a pattern in which a plurality of linear convex parts having a curved part with a bending angle of 30 to 150 degrees are formed at intervals with a space in a plan view,
- a ratio (S / L) of an interval (S) of the plurality of convex portions to a line width (L) of the convex portion is 10 or less.
- the layered product of the present invention is three-dimensionally recognized so that the portion where the curved portions of the plurality of convex portions included in the concavo-convex layer are in a row swells in the front or back, and the depth greater than the thickness of the translucent substrate It is felt and it is superior in design than before.
- the thin film structure is generally referred to as "film”, “sheet” or the like depending on the thickness and the like.
- film shall be used as a term that expresses the concept encompassing them without making any distinction between them.
- FIGS. 1A and 2 to 8 are schematic cross-sectional views showing the laminates of the first to eighth embodiments according to the present invention.
- Laminated body 1A of 1st Embodiment shown to FIG. 1A has the laminated structure where the uneven
- FIG. The uneven layer 20 has unevenness on the surface (upper surface in the drawing) opposite to the light transmitting substrate 11.
- the light-transmissive substrate 11 having a concavo-convex layer 20 having concavities and convexities on the surface, and a reflective layer 30 formed along the concavo-convex surface of the concavo-convex layer 20. It has a laminated structure formed sequentially.
- the translucent substrate 11 side (the lower side in the drawing) is the viewer side.
- the translucent substrate 11 examples include a glass plate, a translucent resin plate, a translucent resin film, a combination thereof, and the like.
- the light-transmissive substrate 11 may have a single-layer structure or a laminated structure, or may be subjected to a treatment such as surface treatment.
- a treatment such as surface treatment.
- a well-known thing can be used for a glass plate, and soda lime glass, borosilicate glass, an alkali free glass, etc. are mentioned.
- the glass plate may be subjected to known surface treatment such as anti-reflection (AR) treatment, antiglare layer (AG) treatment, anti-fingerprint (AFP) treatment, antifouling treatment, anti-bacterial treatment, etc. on the surface.
- the glass plate may be one subjected to known secondary processing such as reinforcement processing.
- Acrylic resin vinyl chloride resin; carbonate resin; epoxy resin; olefin resin such as polyethylene and polypropylene; styrene resin; ABS resin Styrene resins such as; amide resins such as nylon; fluorine resins; phenol resins; melamine resins; ester resins; combinations thereof, and the like.
- the visible light transmittance of the light-transmissive substrate 11 measured in accordance with JIS R 3106 (1998) is preferably 80% or more, more preferably 85% or more, and particularly preferably 90% or more.
- the surface roughness of the light-transmissive substrate 11 (arithmetic mean roughness Ra measured according to JIS B 0601 (2001)) is preferably 10 nm or less, more preferably 5 nm or less, still more preferably 2 nm or less .
- the transparency and surface roughness of the light-transmissive substrate 11 are not limited to the above specifications, and may be subjected to an unevenness forming process such as glare prevention and matting.
- the thickness of the light-transmissive substrate 11 is preferably 0.01 to 20 mm, more preferably 0.05 to 10 mm, and particularly preferably 0.15 to 5 mm.
- the light-transmissive substrate 11 may have a three-dimensional curved surface such as a cylindrical shape, a watch glass shape or the like in addition to a flat shape. Although a specific method will be described later, the light-transmissive substrate 11 may be obtained by molding a light-transmissive material on a concavo-convex substrate made of metal or the like on which the concavo-convex layer 20 is formed.
- the concavo-convex layer 20 has a plurality of convex portions in the form of lines in plan view on the surface opposite to the translucent substrate 21 has a concavo-convex pattern consisting of the concave portions 21 and concave portions formed in the gaps between them.
- reference symbol L denotes a line width of the convex portion
- reference symbol H denotes a height of the convex portion
- reference symbol S denotes an interval between the plurality of convex portions.
- the concavo-convex layer 20 has a pattern in which a plurality of linear convex parts 21 having at least one, preferably a plurality of curved parts having a bending angle of 30 to 150 ° in plan view are formed at intervals.
- the bending angle of the curved portion is preferably 50 to 130 °, more preferably 70 to 110 °, and particularly preferably 90 °.
- the ratio (S / L) of the spacing (S) of the plurality of projections 21 to the line width (L) of the projections 21 is 10 or less, preferably 3 or less, more preferably 1 or less, particularly preferably 0.5 or less is there.
- the sum (L + S) of the line width (L) of the convex portion 21 and the spacing (S) of the plural convex portions 21 is preferably 200 ⁇ m or less, and more preferably 80 ⁇ m or less.
- L + S is 80 ⁇ m or less, the line-shaped convex portion can not be visually recognized, and the designability is improved.
- the lower limit of L + S is not particularly limited, but L + S is 5 ⁇ m or more in manufacture.
- the ratio (D / R) of the distance (D) between the poles of the adjacent curved portions to the radius of curvature (R) of the curved portions is preferably 150 or less, more preferably It is 0.1 to 50, particularly preferably 0.5 to 10, and most preferably 1 to 8.
- the cross-sectional shape of the convex portion 21 is not particularly limited, and, for example, as shown in FIG. 1B, a reverse half (elliptical) or the like is preferable.
- the cross-sectional shape of the convex portion 21 may be rectangular, trapezoidal, or chamfered shape thereof.
- the height of the projections 21 is not particularly limited, and the ratio (H / L) of the height (H) of the projections to the line width (L) of the projections 21 is preferably 0.01 to 100, and more preferably It is 0.1 to 10, particularly preferably 0.2 to 5.
- FIG. 1C shows an example of a planar pattern of one convex portion 21.
- reference numeral BP denotes a curved portion having a bending angle of 30 to 150 °
- reference numerals 21A, 21B and 21C denote poles of the curved portion
- reference numeral CP denotes a connection portion connected to the curved portion.
- the distance (D) between the poles of the curved portions adjacent to each other is the distance between the poles 21A and 21B or the distance between the poles 21B and 21C.
- connection portion CP connected to the curved portion BP may be a curved portion or a straight portion.
- the uneven layer 20 has a first curved portion directed in a first direction and a second directed in a second direction connected via the curved portion BP in a plan view. It can have a pattern in which a plurality of linear convex portions 21 including a curved portion are formed at intervals.
- the concavo-convex layer 20 has a first linear portion directed in a first direction smoothly connected via the curved portion BP and a second linear portion directed in a second direction in plan view. It is possible to have a pattern in which a plurality of linear convex portions 21 including an opening are formed at intervals.
- the line-shaped convex portion 21 can include the first and second connection portions CP which are connected to one curved portion BP and which are curved portions or linear portions and directed in different directions.
- the linear convex portion 21 may not include the connection portion CP.
- the bending angle is defined as follows. When the first or second connection portion CP is a curved portion, a tangent at the inflection point between the first or second bending portion BP and the connection portion CP is obtained. If the first or second connection portion CP is a straight portion, an extension line of the first or second straight portion is obtained. When the connection portion CP is not connected to the bending portion BP, a tangent at an end point of the bending portion BP is obtained. The angle between the tangent or extension on one side of the bend and the tangent or extension on the other side is defined as the bending angle.
- the material of the uneven layer 20 is not particularly limited. However, in order to prevent reflection at the interface between the light transmitting substrate 11 and the uneven layer 20, the difference in refractive index between the light transmitting substrate 11 and the uneven layer 20 is preferably as small as possible. Specifically, the refractive index difference is preferably 0.3 or less, more preferably 0.2 or less, particularly preferably 0.1 or less, and most preferably 0.05 or less.
- the uneven layer 20 can preferably contain a translucent resin.
- the transmittance of the uneven layer 20 is preferably 70% or more, more preferably 80% or more, and particularly preferably 90% or more.
- corrugated layer 20 is not restrict
- a photocurable ink such as an ultraviolet (UV) curable ink
- the uneven layer can be printed on a light transmitting substrate such as a glass plate, a light transmitting resin plate, a light transmitting resin film or the like using a UV printer “UJF-6042MkII” manufactured by Mimaki Engineering.
- the uneven layer can be formed by a simple process using a printing ink which is a low cost material. In this method, pattern design and pattern change are also easy.
- the light-transmitting resin for the uneven layer 20 is not particularly limited, and is generally a phenol resin, a urea resin, a melamine resin, an alkyd resin, an unsaturated polyester resin, an epoxy resin, a diallyl phthalate resin, a polyurethane resin, a silicone resin, etc.
- Thermosetting resins can be used.
- a thermosetting resin for example, after the plurality of convex portions are pattern-printed, the uneven layer 20 is obtained by thermosetting.
- polyethylene resin polypropylene resin, polyvinylidene chloride resin, polyethylene terephthalate resin, polyamide resin, polyacetal resin, polybutylene terephthalate resin, polyphenylene sulfide resin, polyether ether ketone resin, liquid crystal polymer resin, polyimide Resin, acrylonitrile butadiene styrene resin, polystyrene resin, polymethyl methacrylate resin, polyvinyl chloride resin, polycarbonate resin, modified polyphenyrin ether resin, polysulfone resin, polyarylate resin, polyamide imide resin, polyether imide resin, etc.
- Thermoplastic resins can be used as the translucent resin.
- corrugated layer 20 is obtained by pressing the type
- the timing of heating of the translucent resin layer may be before pressing the mold.
- the concavo-convex layer 20 is a separate member from the translucent substrate 11, the surface layer portion of the translucent substrate 11 is concavo-convex processed and concavo-convex processed by a known method
- the surface layer portion may be the uneven layer 20.
- the example shown in FIG. 1A and FIG. 2 is an example in which the concavo-convex layer 20 is formed on the translucent base material 11 prepared in advance, the metal etc.
- corrugated substrate which consists of these may be prepared, and the translucent base material 11 may be shape
- the glass frit or translucent resin heat-melted is provided on an uneven
- Method of coating a resin solution in which a translucent resin is dissolved in a solvent is coated on a concavo-convex substrate and dried by heating drying, reduced pressure drying, reduced pressure heating drying, etc.
- a liquid curable composition containing a precursor of a light transmitting resin such as a monomer, an oligomer, or a prepolymer is coated on a concavo-convex substrate and cured by heating or irradiation with an active energy ray such as ultraviolet light or electron beam And a method of forming the light-transmissive substrate 11 and the like.
- the material of the reflective layer 30 formed along the surface unevenness of the uneven layer 20 may be any material that can effectively reflect light at the interface between the uneven layer 20 and the reflective layer 30, and the refractive index with the uneven layer 20
- High refractive index materials and / or metals with a difference of 0.4 or more are preferred.
- the refractive index difference between the uneven layer 20 and the high refractive index material is more preferably 0.6 or more, particularly preferably 0.8 or more.
- the upper limit of the refractive index difference is not particularly limited, but is usually 1.5 or less.
- metals suitable for use in the reflective layer 30 Mg, Zn, Al, Ga, In, Y, La, Ce, Pr, Nd, Ti, Zr, Sn, Fe, Co, Ni, V, Nb, Ta, It is preferable to use an elemental metal or alloy consisting of at least one element selected from the group consisting of Cr, Mo, W, Mn, Cu, Ag, Au, Pd, and Pt. Among them, Al and / or Ag are preferable because the reflectance is large.
- Preferred high refractive index materials used for the reflective layer 30 TiO 2, ZrO 2, ZnO, Nb 2 O 5, Ta 2 O 5, Al 2 O 3, In 2 O 3, SnO 2, ZnS, and DLC At least one material selected from the group consisting of (diamond like carbon) is preferred. Among them, at least one material selected from the group consisting of TiO 2 , Nb 2 O 5 , and ZnO is preferable because the material is inexpensive.
- the method for forming the reflective layer 30 is not particularly limited, and a known method such as a vapor phase method such as a sputtering method or an evaporation method; a coating method; a printing method or the like can be applied.
- the reflective layer 30 may have a laminated structure of a plurality of films having different refractive indexes.
- the reflective layer 30 may be a light interference film, and the reflectance may be increased.
- an optical interference film can be easily obtained by depositing TiO 2 and SiO 2 alternately.
- the reflective layer 30 can be formed on all or part of the surface of the uneven layer 20.
- the laminate 1B is required to transmit radio waves.
- the laminate 1B including the reflective layer 30 made of metal tends to deteriorate the radio wave permeability, but by partially forming the reflective layer 30 on the surface of the uneven layer 20, the radio wave can be transmitted. I can improve the sex.
- the laminate 1A according to the first embodiment which does not have the reflective layer 30 In the laminate 1A according to the first embodiment which does not have the reflective layer 30, light incident from the side of the light transmissive substrate 11 is reflected at the interface between the surface irregularities of the uneven layer 20 and air, and the reflected image is viewed. In the laminate 1B of the second embodiment having the reflective layer 30, light incident from the side of the light transmissive substrate 11 is reflected at the interface between the surface irregularities of the uneven layer 20 and the reflective layer 30, and a reflected image is viewed .
- the light incident from the side of the light transmitting substrate 11 is mainly reflected in the line width direction of the line-shaped convex portion 21 in plan view, and is hardly reflected in the direction perpendicular to the line width direction.
- the contrast in the line width direction of the linear convex portions 21 and the direction perpendicular to the line width direction becomes larger.
- the bending angle of the convex portion 21 is 30 to 150 ° in plan view, the extending direction of the convex portion is significantly changed at the curved portion, and the contrast is significantly generated at the curved portion. This contrast tends to increase as the bending angle approaches 90 °.
- the portion where the plurality of curved portions BP are connected is visually recognized in a three-dimensional manner so as to bulge toward the near side or the far side. It is determined by the positional relationship between the light source, the laminate, and the observer whether the light is viewed on the front side or the back side.
- the three photographs shown in FIGS. 9A to 9C are examples of surface photographs of an example of the laminate of the second embodiment, and are photographs of the same sample taken at different magnifications.
- the laminate shown in FIGS. 9A to 9C has a first straight portion LP1 and a second direction directed in a first direction (diagonally upper right direction in the figure) smoothly connected via the curved portion BP in a plan view.
- the photographs shown in FIGS. 9A to 9C are photographs of the surface of the reflective layer formed on the uneven layer, and the surface unevenness of the reflective layer corresponds to the surface unevenness of the uneven layer.
- the portion where the curved portions BP of the plurality of convex portions included in the concavo-convex layer 20 are continuous is visually recognized three-dimensionally as if swelling on the front side or the back side. A depth greater than the thickness of the base material 11 is felt, and the designability is superior to that of the prior art.
- the concavo-convex layer 20 has at least one, preferably a plurality of curved portions with a bending angle of 30 to 150 °.
- the bending angle of the curved portion is preferably 50 to 130 °, more preferably 70 to 110 °, and particularly preferably 90 °.
- the ratio (S / L) of the spacing (S) of the plurality of projections 21 to the line width (L) of the projections 21 is 10 or less, preferably 3 or less.
- the ratio (D / R) of the distance (D) between the poles of the adjacent curved portions to the radius of curvature (R) of the curved portions is preferably 150 or less, more preferably It is 0.1 to 50, particularly preferably 0.5 to 10, and most preferably 1 to 8.
- the concavo-convex layer 20 When the concavo-convex layer 20 satisfies the above conditions, the occurrence of contrast and stereoscopic vision are effectively expressed, and the portion where the curved portions BP of the plurality of convex portions 21 included in the concavo-convex layer 20 are connected is on the front side or the back side
- the laminates 1A and 1B can be provided such that they are visually recognized in a three-dimensional manner so as to expand, have a depth greater than the thickness of the light-transmissive substrate 11, and are superior in design to conventional ones.
- connection portion CP connecting the adjacent curved portions BP includes a linear portion.
- light incident from the side of the light transmissive substrate 11 is mainly reflected in the line width direction of the line-shaped convex portion 21 in plan view, and is hardly reflected in the direction perpendicular to the line width direction.
- the connection portion CP includes a linear portion
- the curved portion BP and the linear portion have different reflection characteristics because the line width direction is different, and a contrast is significantly generated at the boundary between the curved portion BP and the linear portion. Due to this contrast, a portion in which a plurality of curved portions BP are connected is likely to be viewed three-dimensionally as if it bulges to the front side or the back side.
- the portion where the plurality of curved portions BP are connected is the front side or the back side It is easy to be seen three-dimensionally as if it were swollen.
- the plurality of first straight portions LP1 or the plurality of first curved portions toward the first direction (the obliquely upper right direction in the drawing)
- the uneven layer 20 includes one or more regions A1 in which a plurality of first linear portions LP1 or a plurality of first curved portions are formed, and a plurality of second linear portions LP2 or a plurality of second curved portions. There can be one or more regions A2 to be formed, and the arrangement of the one or more regions A1 and the one or more regions A2 can be appropriately changed in design.
- FIGS. 13 to 16 show examples of patterns of the plurality of convex portions 21 of the concavo-convex layer which looks like a facet glass.
- the pattern of the concavo-convex layer of the aspect shown in FIGS. 13 to 16 is a first straight portion LP1 directed to the first direction smoothly connected via the curved portion BP and a second direction in plan view.
- a plurality of line-shaped convex portions 21 formed of the second linear portion LP2 have a convex portion group formed periodically at equal pitches.
- the concavo-convex layer can include a convex portion group in which the curved portions BP of the plurality of convex portions 21 formed at intervals are linearly continued in plan view, and preferably from one central portion without overlapping each other A plurality of radially extending convex groups may be included.
- the curved portions BP of the plurality of convex portions 21 formed at a plurality of intervals are linear. It is easy to be visually recognized in three dimensions so that the part which continued in a line swells to the near side or back side, and is preferable.
- the pattern 2X of the embodiment shown in FIG. 13 is formed by connecting the first to fourth straight lines LA1 to LA4 in which the curved portions BP of the plurality of convex portions 21 formed at intervals are extended from the center point in different directions.
- the fourth group of convex portions 22A to 22D are included. These four convex portion groups 22A to 22D extend in different radial directions (a total of four directions) from one central portion without overlapping each other.
- the four convex portions 22A to 22D have the same maximum width.
- the intersections of the first to fourth straight lines LA1 to LA4 are central points, and the central point and the vicinity thereof are central parts.
- the first to fourth straight lines LA1 to LA4 extend radially at equal intervals of 90 °. In FIG.
- the symbol W max is the maximum width of the convex portion group (maximum width when one convex portion group consisting of a plurality of convex portions is regarded as one mass).
- the symbol R denotes the radial length of the convex portion group (the radial length of the convex portion group when one convex portion group including a plurality of convex portions is regarded as one mass).
- the pattern 3 of the embodiment shown in FIG. 14 is formed by connecting the first to eighth straight lines LB1 to LB8 in which the curved portions BP of the plurality of convex portions 21 formed at intervals are extended from the center point in different directions.
- Eight convex portions 23A-23H are formed by connecting the first to eighth straight lines LB1 to LB8 in which the curved portions BP of the plurality of convex portions 21 formed at intervals are extended from the center point in different directions.
- Eight convex portions 23A-23H These eight convex portion groups 23A to 23H extend in different radial directions (total eight directions) from one central portion without overlapping each other.
- the eight convex portions 23A to 23H have the same maximum width.
- the intersections of the first to eighth straight lines LB1 to LB8 are central points, and the central point and the vicinity thereof are central parts.
- the first to eighth straight lines LB1 to LB8 extend radially at 45 ° intervals.
- the number of convex portions extending from one central portion can be changed as appropriate.
- a plurality of convex portions are not overlapped from each other in the radial direction from one central portion. It can also be 36 extended convex groups. In this case, the center lines of the convex groups extend radially at equal intervals of 10 °.
- the lower right part of FIG. 15 is a partially enlarged view of the central point and the vicinity thereof.
- a direction in which the curved portions of the plurality of convex portions formed with a gap are continuous is a first linear direction
- a direction in which the curved portions of the plurality of convex portions formed at intervals are continuous is a second linear direction, and an angle formed by the first linear direction and the second linear direction.
- ⁇ be. From the viewpoint of three-dimensional visual effects, ⁇ is preferably 10 to 170 °, more preferably 45 to 135 °, still more preferably 80 to 100 °, and particularly preferably 90 °.
- a boundary between the first group of convex portions and the second group of convex portions extends from the intersection of the first linear direction and the second linear direction with the first linear direction and the second linear direction. It is preferable to be parallel to a bisector or a straight line of an angle within ⁇ ⁇ / 4 from the bisector. By doing this, it is possible to naturally connect the first convex group and the second convex group adjacent to each other formed along different directions without discomfort, and three-dimensional visual recognition becomes effective. .
- the first convex group is the convex group 22A
- the second convex group is the convex group 22B
- the first straight line direction is the direction of the straight line LA1
- the straight line direction of is the direction of the straight line LA2
- the boundary between the first convex portion group and the second convex portion group can be the direction of the straight line MA1.
- ⁇ is 90 °.
- the boundary line MA1 between the first convex portion group and the second convex portion group is the first linear direction and the second linear direction. It can coincide with the bisector NA1 of the first linear direction and the second linear direction extending from the intersection with the linear direction.
- the first convex group is the convex group 23A
- the second convex group is the convex group 23B
- the first straight line direction is the direction of the straight line LB1, the second straight line direction.
- the straight line direction may be the direction of the straight line LB2
- the boundary between the first convex portion group and the second convex portion group may be the direction of the straight line MB1.
- ⁇ is 45 °.
- the boundary line MB1 between the first convex portion group and the second convex portion group is the first linear direction and the second linear direction.
- the pattern 2Y of the aspect shown in FIG. 16 is an example in which the maximum width of the convex portions 22B and 22D is smaller than the maximum width of the convex portions 22A and 22C in the pattern 2X of the aspect shown in FIG.
- the boundary line MA1 between the first convex group and the second convex group is a first linear direction and a second linear direction extending from an intersection of the first linear direction and the second linear direction.
- the end portions 21E (see FIG. 13) of the individual convex portions 21 be curved portions having a bending angle of 105 to 165 ° in plan view.
- the formed portions and the non-formed portions of the convex portions are visually recognized as being naturally connected.
- a decorative layer 40 may be provided between the translucent base 11 and the concavo-convex layer 20 as in a laminate 1 ⁇ / b> C of the third embodiment shown in FIG. 3.
- the decorative layer 40 is a layer for enhancing design, and is a translucent layer having a color, a pattern, a pattern, and the like.
- the method for forming the decorative layer 40 is not particularly limited, and for example, a method of printing by a known method such as screen printing or inkjet printing using a photocurable ink containing a photocurable resin is preferable.
- the decorative layer 40 can be, for example, a black and white or color printing layer.
- the laminate 1C of the third embodiment has the same basic configuration as the laminate 1B of the second embodiment, and can exert the same effects as the laminate 1B of the second embodiment.
- Laminated body 1C of a 3rd embodiment can raise designability more by having decoration layer 40.
- the laminate 1C according to the third embodiment having the reflective layer 30, as in the laminate 1B according to the second embodiment the light incident from the side of the light transmitting substrate 11 causes the surface irregularities of the uneven layer 20 and the reflective layer 30 The light is reflected at the interface, and the reflected image is viewed.
- the light incident from the side of the light transmitting substrate 11 is not provided with the reflective layer 30, and the surface irregularities of the uneven layer 20 and air. It may be made to reflect at the interface of
- the formation position of the decoration layer 40 can be changed suitably.
- the reflective layer 30 preferably has translucency so that the decorative layer 40 can be viewed from the translucent substrate 11 side.
- the laminate 1D of the fourth embodiment has the same basic configuration as the laminate 1B of the second embodiment, and can exert the same effects as the laminate 1B of the second embodiment.
- a first decorative layer 40 is provided between the light transmitting substrate 11 and the concavo-convex layer 20, and the first decorative layer 40 is further formed on the reflective layer 30.
- Two decorative layers 41 may be formed.
- the laminate 1E of the fifth embodiment has the same basic configuration as the laminate 1C of the third embodiment, and can exert the same effects as the laminate 1C of the third embodiment.
- the layered product 1E of a 5th embodiment can raise design nature more by having two decoration layers 40 and 41.
- the laminate 1F of the sixth embodiment shown in FIG. 6, the laminate 1G of the seventh embodiment shown in FIG. 7, and the laminate 1H of the eighth embodiment shown in FIG. The pre-laminates PL1 to PL3 in which the concavo-convex layer 20, the reflective layer 30, and the decorative layers 40 and 41 as necessary are formed on the surface (upper surface in the drawing), and the translucent member 12 It is pasted through 50.
- the translucent resin film 50 is an adhesive film or an adhesive film.
- a translucent base material 11 a glass plate, a translucent resin board, a translucent resin film, these combinations, etc. are mentioned.
- the translucent member 12 the same material as the translucent substrate 11 can be used. When a translucent resin film is used as the translucent substrate 11, it is possible to manufacture the pre-laminate PL at a low cost by a so-called roll to roll process.
- an interlayer film of laminated glass containing one or more thermoplastic resins such as polyvinyl acetal such as ethylene / vinyl acetate copolymer (EVA), polyvinyl butyral (PVB), ionomer, etc.
- Adhesive materials for use; adhesive materials such as acrylics, rubbers, urethanes and silicones are preferably used.
- the form of the material for the translucent resin film 50 is preferably a thermoplastic resin film such as an EVA film, a PVB film, or an ionomer film; a transparent adhesive film such as an acrylic, rubber, urethane, or silicone type.
- the translucent resin film 50 may have a single layer structure or a multilayer structure of two or more layers.
- the translucent resin film 50 may have a laminated structure of an adhesive film and an adhesive film. For example, in a film having a laminated structure in which an acrylic, rubber or silicone adhesive film is formed on the surface of a thermoplastic EVA film, the high adhesion of the EVA film and the removability of the adhesive film (repeated It can have the property which can be stuck / peeled off.
- the translucent resin film 50 can contain a coloring agent as needed.
- the laminate can exhibit a color in which the color of the decorative layer and the color of the light-transmitting resin film are combined.
- a coloring agent a well-known thing can be used and a pigment, dye, these combinations are mentioned.
- the translucent resin film 50 can contain an ultraviolet (UV) absorber as needed. The UV absorber can prevent deterioration of the uneven layer 20, the reflective layer 30, and the decorative layers 40, 41 due to ultraviolet light.
- the translucent member 12 side (upper side in the drawing) is the viewer side.
- the laminate 1F light incident from the light transmitting member 12 side is reflected at the interface between the surface asperity of the uneven layer 20 and the reflective layer 30, and a reflected image is visually recognized.
- the laminate 1F of the sixth embodiment has the same basic configuration as the laminate 1D of the fourth embodiment, and can exert the same effects as the laminate 1D of the fourth embodiment.
- the decorative layer 40, the concavo-convex layer 20, and the reflective layer 30 are sequentially formed on one surface (upper surface in the drawing) of the translucent substrate 11 It may be a laminate.
- the first decorative layer 40, the concavo-convex layer 20, the reflective layer 30, and the second layer are formed on one surface (upper surface in the drawing) of the translucent substrate 11.
- the decorative layer 41 may be sequentially formed to be a preliminary laminate.
- the laminates 1A to 1H of the first to eighth embodiments can be appropriately changed in design without departing from the scope of the present invention.
- the concavo-convex layer 20, the reflective layer 30, the decorative layers 40 and 41, and the translucent resin film 50 can contain any additive as needed.
- the laminates 1A to 1H can include any other elements than those described above, if necessary, and the configuration can be changed as appropriate. For example, as in a laminate 1I shown in FIG. 17, even a laminate including the light-transmissive member 12, the light-transmissive resin film 50, the light-transmissive substrate 11, and the concavo-convex layer 20 in order from the viewer side Good.
- a laminate including the light-transmissive member 12, the light-transmissive resin film 50, the light-transmissive substrate 11, the concavo-convex layer 20, and the reflective layer 30 in order from the viewer side It may be
- the light-transmissive member 12, the light-transmissive resin film 50, the decorative layer 40, the light-transmissive substrate 11, the uneven layer 20, and the reflective layer are sequentially from the viewer side.
- It may be a laminate comprising 30.
- the light-transmissive member 12, the light-transmissive resin film 50, the reflective layer 30, the uneven layer 20, the light-transmissive substrate 11, and the decoration layer are sequentially from the observer side.
- 40 may be a laminated body.
- the light-transmissive member 12, the light-transmissive resin film 50, the light-transmissive substrate 11, the uneven layer 20, the decorative layer 40, and the reflective layer are sequentially from the viewer side.
- It may be a laminate comprising 30.
- the decorative layer 40 may be formed in a region where the concavo-convex layer 20 is not formed.
- the decorative layer 40 is not formed with the uneven layer 20 in plan view It may be formed in all areas.
- ⁇ Thermoplastic resin film> EVA film (10 cm long ⁇ 10 cm wide ⁇ 0.4 mm thick, “AB film” manufactured by Bridgestone Corporation), (F2) Polyethylene terephthalate (PET) film (10 cm long ⁇ 10 cm wide ⁇ 125 ⁇ m thickness, manufactured by Printer Paper Pro, Inc.). (F3) Polycarbonate film (10 cm in length ⁇ 10 cm in width ⁇ 50 ⁇ m in thickness, “C000” manufactured by ESCABO SHEET CO., LTD.). ⁇ Transparent double-sided tape> (T1) Transparent double-sided tape (10 cm in length ⁇ 10 cm in width ⁇ 50 ⁇ m in thickness, “G25” manufactured by Niei Kasei Co., Ltd.). ⁇ UV printer> MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO., LTD., UJF-6042 Mk II.
- Example 1-1 to 1-24 In each of Examples 1-1 to 1-24, using a UV printer and changing the printing conditions, a clear ink having a refractive index of 1.51 (manufactured by MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO., LTD.) Is applied to almost the entire surface of the glass plate (G1). Printing is carried out using LH-100-CL-BA, and any one of transparent concavo-convex printing layers (P1) ((P1-1) to (P1-24) having a laminated structure as shown in FIG. 1A ) / Laminated glass plate (G1) was obtained.
- P1 transparent concavo-convex printing layers
- the printing pattern is a pattern in which, in plan view, a plurality of linear convex portions having a plurality of curved portions are formed at intervals. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9A to 9C, in plan view, the first straight portion and the first straight portion directed in the first direction (the obliquely upper right direction in the figure) connected smoothly through the curved portion. A plurality of linear convex portions having a pattern consisting of a second linear portion directed in the two directions (in the obliquely lower right direction in the drawing) and repeated continuously in the horizontal direction in the drawing It was set as the formed pattern.
- the number of bending of one linear convex portion, the linear length (the lengths of the first linear portion and the second linear portion (these lengths are the same. )) (Mm), distance between pole points of adjacent curved parts (D) (mm), radius of curvature of curved parts (R) (mm), ratio of linear length to radius of curvature (R) of curved parts (R) Straight line length / R), ratio of distance (D) between pole points of adjacent curved parts to radius of curvature (R) of curved part (D / R), bending angle of convex part (connected via the curved part) Angle between the first linear portion and the second linear portion) (°), line width (L) of convex portion ( ⁇ m), distance ( ⁇ m) between plural convex portions (S), line of convex portions
- the laminate obtained in each example was visually observed from the side of the transparent concavo-convex printed layer (P1) (any one of (P1-1) to (P1-24)) and the glass plate (G1) side, and the following criteria were used.
- the level of stereoscopic vision was assessed.
- the concavo-convex layer has a pattern in which a plurality of line-shaped convex parts having a plurality of curved parts having a bending angle of 30 to 150 degrees are formed at intervals in plan view, and the line width (L) of the convex parts
- the ratio (S / L) of the spacing (S) of the plurality of convex portions to that of 10 is 10 or less
- the transparent asperity is visible from either the transparent asperity print layer (P1) side or the glass plate (G1) side
- the portion where the curved portions of the plurality of convex portions included in the printing layer (P1) are connected is three-dimensionally viewed as if it is bulging toward the front side or the back side, the depth more than the glass thickness is felt, and the designability is high .
- the ratio (D / R) between the distance (D) between the extreme points of the adjacent curved portions to the radius of curvature (R) of the curved portion is 150 or less, the stereoscopic vision is enhanced, and the depth more than the glass thickness was felt, and the design was higher.
- the ratio (S / L) of the spacing (S) of the plurality of convex portions to the line width (L) of the convex portions is 3 or less, and the pole points of the adjacent curved portions to the radius of curvature (R) of the curved portion
- the ratio (D / R) of the distance (D) is 0.1 to 50 and the bending angle of the curved portion is 50 to 130 °, the stereoscopic vision is increased and the depth greater than the glass thickness is felt. The design was higher.
- Example 2 On the transparent asperity printed layer (P1-8) of the laminate obtained in Example 1-8, Al is deposited to a thickness of 100 nm as a reflective layer by a sputtering method, and it has a laminate structure as shown in FIG. A laminate of Al reflective layer (R1) / transparent uneven printed layer (P1-8) / glass plate (G1) was obtained. The level of stereoscopic vision was visually evaluated for the obtained laminate.
- the obtained laminated body has a portion where the curved portions of the plurality of convex portions included in the transparent asperity printed layer (P1) are continuous even when viewed from either the Al reflective layer (R1) side or the glass plate (G1) side It was visually recognized in a three-dimensional manner as if it swelled to the near side or the far side, and a depth greater than the glass thickness was felt, and the designability was high.
- the obtained laminate has a strong reflection along the transparent relief printing, and as a reflective layer on the transparent relief print layer (P1) along the surface irregularities. It was found that by forming a metal layer with high reflectance, it is possible to emphasize stereoscopic vision.
- FIG. 9A uses a camera “TOUGH TG-5” (manufactured by Olympus Corporation), and FIGS. 9B and 9C are obtained in Example 2 while changing the magnification using an optical microscope “VHX-S15” (manufactured by Keyence Corporation). It is a surface photograph obtained by imaging the obtained laminate.
- a portion where a plurality of first straight portions are continuous in the vertical direction in the drawing is relatively bright, and a portion where a plurality of second straight portions is continuous is relatively dark and bright and dark stripes are observed.
- the portion where a plurality of curved portions were connected in the vertical direction in the drawing is between streaks of light and dark, and it is three-dimensionally viewed as if it bulges to the front side or the back side, and a depth greater than the glass thickness is felt.
- Example 3 A 60 nm thick ZnO (refractive index: 2.0) film was formed as a reflective layer by sputtering on the transparent asperity printed layer (P1-8) of the laminate obtained in Example 1-8, as shown in FIG. A laminate of a ZnO reflective layer (R2) / a transparent concavo-convex printed layer (P1) / a glass plate (G1) having a laminated structure was obtained. The level of stereoscopic vision was visually evaluated for the obtained laminate.
- the obtained laminated body has a portion where the curved portions of the plurality of convex portions included in the transparent asperity printed layer (P1) are continuous even when viewed from either the ZnO reflective layer (R2) side or the glass plate (G1) side It was visually recognized in a three-dimensional manner as if it swelled to the near side or the far side, and a depth greater than the glass thickness was felt, and the designability was high.
- the obtained laminate has a strong reflection along the transparent relief printing, and as a reflective layer on the transparent relief print layer (P1) along the surface irregularities. It was found that by forming a metal oxide layer having a large difference in refractive index with the transparent asperity printed layer, it is possible to emphasize stereoscopic vision.
- Example 4 A UV printer was used on a glass plate (G1) to form a colored printed decorative layer (P2) of wood grain pattern.
- a transparent asperity printed layer (P1-8) is formed thereon in the same manner as in Example 1-1, and the transparent asperity printed layer (P1-8) / wood grain colored printed decorative layer (P2) / glass plate (G1) ) was obtained. The level of stereoscopic vision was visually evaluated for the obtained laminate.
- the portion where the curved portions of the plurality of convex portions included in the transparent uneven print layer (P1) are connected is the front side or the back side It looked three-dimensionally as if it were swollen, and felt depth more than glass thickness, and the designability was high.
- Example 5 A 100 nm thick film of Al is formed as a reflective layer on the transparent concavo-convex printed layer (P1-8) of the laminate obtained in Example 4 by a sputtering method to have a laminate structure as shown in FIG. 3, Al reflection A layered product of a layer (R1) / transparent concavo-convex printing layer (P1) / colored printed decorative layer of wood grain pattern (P2) / glass plate (G1) was obtained. The level of stereoscopic vision was visually evaluated for the obtained laminate.
- the reflection along the transparent relief printing becomes stronger than that of the laminate obtained in Example 4, and the contrast of the wood grain pattern is improved, and on the transparent relief printing layer (P1-8) It has been found that by forming a metal layer having a high reflectance as a reflective layer along the surface irregularities, it is possible to enhance the stereoscopic vision.
- Example 6 A colored printed decorative layer (P2) of wood grain pattern is formed on the transparent asperity printed layer (P1-8) of the laminate obtained in Example 1-8 using a UV printer, and the colored printing of wood grain pattern is printed
- corrugated printing layer (P1) / glass plate (G1) was obtained.
- the level of stereoscopic vision was visually evaluated for the obtained laminate. When the obtained laminate was viewed from the side of the glass plate (G1), a relative decrease in stereoscopic vision was observed as compared with the laminate obtained in Example 1-1.
- Example 7 On the reflective layer (R1) of the laminate obtained in Example 2, a colored printed decorative layer (P2) of wood grain pattern was formed using a UV printer to obtain a preliminary laminate. An EVA film (F1) and a glass plate (G1) were sequentially stacked on the colored print decoration layer (P2) of the grain pattern of this preliminary laminate, to obtain a temporary laminate. The temporary laminate was placed in a film bag, and the mouth of the bag was sealed by heating under vacuum to form a vacuum pack, which was heat-pressed at 100 ° C. for 2 hours.
- the laminate after thermocompression bonding is taken out of the bag, and a glass plate (G1) / EVA film (F1) / wood grain pattern colored printed decorative layer (P2) / Al reflective layer having a laminated structure as shown in FIG. 6
- a laminate of (R1) / transparent uneven printed layer (P1-8) / glass plate (G1) was obtained.
- the level of stereoscopic vision was visually evaluated for the obtained laminate.
- the colored print of wood grain pattern is a curved portion of a plurality of convex portions included in the transparent uneven print layer (P1)
- the three-dimensional view was made as if the part where was bulging toward the front side or the back side, the depth more than the glass thickness was felt, and the designability was high.
- Example 8 A glass plate (G1) / EVA film having a laminated structure as shown in FIG. 5 in the same manner as in Example 7 except that the Al reflection layer (R1) is changed to the ZnO reflection layer (R2) formed in Example 3.
- a laminate of (F1) / colored and printed decorative layer with wood grain pattern (P2) / ZnO reflective layer (R2) / transparent uneven printed layer (P1-8) / glass plate (G1) was obtained. The level of stereoscopic vision was visually evaluated for the obtained laminate.
- the colored print of wood grain pattern is a curved portion of a plurality of convex portions included in the transparent uneven print layer (P1)
- the three-dimensional view was made as if the part where was bulging toward the front side or the back side, the depth more than the glass thickness was felt, and the designability was high.
- Example 9 As shown in FIG. 5 in the same manner as in Example 8 except that a PET film (F2) was used instead of the glass plate (G1) as the light-transmissive substrate forming the transparent asperity printed layer (P1) on the surface.
- Glass plate (G1) / EVA film (F1) / wooden pattern colored printed decorative layer (P2) / ZnO reflective layer (R2) / transparent uneven printed layer (P1-8) / PET film (F2) having a laminated structure ) was obtained.
- the portion where the curved portions of the plurality of convex portions included in the transparent uneven print layer (P1) are connected is the front side or the back side It looked three-dimensionally as if it were swollen, and felt depth more than glass thickness, and the designability was high.
- Example 10 A 60 nm thick ZnO (refractive index: 2.0) film was formed as a reflective layer on the transparent asperity printed layer (P1-8) of the laminate obtained in Example 1-8 by sputtering, and a UV printer was used.
- the colored printed decorative layer (P2) of the wood grain pattern is formed, and the colored printed decorative layer (P2) of the grain pattern / ZnO reflective layer (R2) / transparent uneven printed layer (P1) / glass plate (G1) A laminate was obtained. The level of stereoscopic vision was visually evaluated for the obtained laminate.
- a colored printed decorative layer (P2) of wood grain pattern is formed on a reflective layer (R2) of the laminate obtained in Example 3 using a UV printer, and a colored printed decoration layer of wood grain pattern (P2)
- a laminate of a / ZnO reflective layer (R2) / a transparent uneven printed layer (P1-8) / a colored printed decorative layer with a grain pattern (P2) / a glass plate (G1) was obtained. The level of stereoscopic vision was visually evaluated for the obtained laminate.
- Example 12 On the transparent asperity printed layer (P1-8) of the laminate obtained in Example 4, 60 nm of ZnO (refractive index: 2.0) was formed as a reflective layer by sputtering to obtain a preliminary laminate .
- An EVA film (F1) and a glass plate (G1) were sequentially stacked on the colored print decoration layer (P2) of the grain pattern of this preliminary laminate, to obtain a temporary laminate.
- the temporary laminate was placed in a film bag, and the mouth of the bag was sealed by heating under vacuum to form a vacuum pack, which was heat-pressed at 100 ° C. for 2 hours.
- the laminated body after thermocompression bonding is taken out of the bag, and a glass plate (G1) / EVA film (F1) / ZnO reflective layer (R2) / transparent uneven printed layer (P1-8) having a laminated structure as shown in FIG. 7 ) / A laminated body of colored printed decorative layer of wood grain (P2) / glass plate (G1) was obtained. The level of stereoscopic vision was visually evaluated for the obtained laminate.
- the obtained laminate When the obtained laminate is viewed from the side of the glass plate (G1) stacked on the EVA film (F1), the curves of the plurality of convex portions included in the transparent concavo-convex printing layer (P1) before coloring printing of wood grain pattern
- the three-dimensional view was made so that the portion where the parts were connected was bulging toward the front side or the back side, the depth more than the thickness of the glass was felt, and the designability was high.
- Example 13 Using a UV printer, ZnO (refractive index: 2.0) is deposited to a thickness of 60 nm as a reflective layer on the transparent asperity printed layer (P1-8) of the laminate obtained in Example 4 by sputtering A colored printed decorative layer (P2) of wood grain pattern was formed to obtain a preliminary laminate. An EVA film (F1) and a glass plate (G2) were sequentially stacked on the colored print decoration layer (P2) of the grain pattern of this preliminary laminate, to obtain a temporary laminate. The temporary laminate was placed in a film bag, and the mouth of the bag was sealed by heating under vacuum to form a vacuum pack, which was heat-pressed at 100 ° C. for 2 hours.
- ZnO reffractive index: 2.0
- the laminate after thermocompression bonding is taken out of the bag, and a glass plate (G1) / EVA film (F1) / wood-patterned colored printed decorative layer (P2) / ZnO reflective layer having a laminated structure as shown in FIG. 8
- a laminate of (R2) / transparent uneven printed layer (P1) / colored and printed decorative layer with grain pattern (P2) / glass plate (G1) was obtained.
- the level of stereoscopic vision was visually evaluated for the obtained laminate.
- the colored print of wood grain pattern is a curved portion of a plurality of convex portions included in the transparent uneven print layer (P1)
- the three-dimensional view was made as if the part where was bulging toward the front side or the back side, the depth more than the glass thickness was felt, and the designability was high.
- the transparent concavo-convex printing layers (P14) to (P16) are a first straight part directed in a first direction smoothly connected via a curved part and a second straight line directed in a second direction in plan view.
- a plurality of line-shaped convex parts consisting of parts have a plurality of convex part groups periodically formed at equal pitches.
- the transparent concavo-convex printing layers (P14) to (P16) are respectively four (example 14), eight (example 15), 36 (36 examples) radially extending in different radial directions from one central portion without overlapping each other.
- the convex part group of Example 16) is included.
- the direction in which the curved portions of the convex portions formed at intervals are continued is set as a second linear direction, and the first linear direction and the second linear direction. Is 90 ° (Example 14), 45 ° (Example 15), and 10 ° (Example 16), where ⁇ is the angle between them.
- the maximum width W max of each convex portion group is 2.5 mm.
- radial direction length R of each convex part group was 5 mm (Example 14), 10 mm (Example 15), and 30 mm (Example 16), respectively.
- the first straight line direction and the second straight line extend from the intersection of the first straight line direction and the second straight line direction with the boundary between the first convex group and the second convex group. Match the bisector with the direction.
- Table 2 shows various data of one linear convex portion for each example.
- data of convex portions of a plurality of portions of the same length are arranged in one convex portion group. It has been described.
- the end portions are curved portions, the “curved portion between the first straight portion and the second straight portion and the curved portion at one end portion are used as“ the adjacent curved portions ”. Adopted. The bending angle of the end curve was 135 °.
- Each of the laminates obtained in these examples had an appearance like a sculpted facet glass when viewed from the glass plate (G1) side, and the designability was high.
- Example 17 A laminate of transparent asperity print layer (P17) / glass plate (G1) was obtained in the same manner as in Example 14 except that the pattern of the transparent asperity print layer was changed to those shown in FIG. 13 to FIG.
- the length of the linear portion of each convex of the convex portions 22B and 22D is shortened by 0.68 mm.
- the maximum width of the convex portions 22B and 22D is smaller than the maximum width of the convex portions 22A and 22C.
- the length of the linear part of each convex part is the data of the convex part of the part arranged in multiple numbers by the same length in one convex part group.
- the boundary line MA1 between the first convex group and the second convex group is a first linear direction extending from the intersection of the first linear direction and the second linear direction.
- a second straight line direction in which the bisector NA1 is moved in parallel is obtained by designing in this manner, like the examples 14 to 16, when viewed from the side of the glass plate (G1), an appearance like a facetted glass having an engraving was obtained, and the designability was high.
- Example 17 to 20 Using a clear ink (LH-100-CL-BA) having a refractive index of 1.51 on a polycarbonate film (F3) by gravure printing, the transparent concavo-convex printing layer ((P17) to (P17) of the pattern shown in FIG. One of (P20) was formed to obtain a laminate of a transparent unevenly printed layer (one of (P17) to (P20)) / polycarbonate film (F3). Next, a glass plate (G1) is laminated with a transparent double-sided tape (T1) on the surface opposite to the surface on which the transparent asperity printed layer of the polycarbonate film of these laminates is formed, so that air does not enter.
- a clear ink LH-100-CL-BA
- T1 transparent double-sided tape
- the transparent concavo-convex printing layers (P17) to (P20) are a first straight part directed in a first direction smoothly connected via a curved part and a second straight line directed in a second direction in plan view.
- a plurality of line-shaped convex parts consisting of parts have a plurality of convex part groups periodically formed at equal pitches.
- the transparent asperity print layers (P17) to (P20) include four convex groups radially extending in different radial directions from one central portion without overlapping each other.
- the direction in which the curved portions of the convex portions formed at intervals are continued is set as a second linear direction, and the first linear direction and the second linear direction.
- ⁇ is 90 °.
- the maximum width W max of each convex portion group is 2.5 mm.
- radial direction length R of each convex part group was 5 mm (Example 14), 10 mm (Example 15), and 30 mm (Example 16), respectively.
- the first straight line direction and the second straight line extend from the intersection of the first straight line direction and the second straight line direction with the boundary between the first convex group and the second convex group. Match the bisector with the direction.
- Table 3 shows various data of one linear convex portion for each example.
- data of convex portions of a plurality of portions of the same length are arranged in one convex portion group. It has been described. Further, in these examples, since the end portions are curved portions, the “curved portion between the first straight portion and the second straight portion and the curved portion at one end portion are used as“ the adjacent curved portions ”. Adopted.
- the bending angle of the end curve was 135 °.
- the laminate obtained in each of Examples 17 to 20 was visually observed from the side of the glass plate (G1), an appearance like a facetted glass having an engraving was obtained, and the designability was high. Further, the glass plate (G1) appeared to be iridescent, and the designability was high. This rainbow color appeared to have a stronger contrast in the laminates of Examples 19 and 20 than in the laminates of Examples 17 and 18. It was confirmed that the iridescent contrast becomes stronger as the line width (L) of the convex portions and the interval (S) of the convex portions of the transparent asperity printed layer become smaller.
- Example 21 A 50 nm thick film of ZnS (refractive index: 2.3) was formed as a reflective layer on the transparent concavo-convex printed layer (P19) of the laminate obtained in Example 19 as a reflective layer by a sputtering method, as shown in FIG. A laminate of ZnS reflective layer (R3) / transparent uneven print layer ((P19) / polycarbonate film (F3) / transparent double-sided tape (T1) / glass plate (G1) having the above was obtained.
- ZnS reflective layer (R3) / transparent uneven print layer ((P19) / polycarbonate film (F3) / transparent double-sided tape (T1) / glass plate (G1) having the above was obtained.
- Example 22 A laminate of a transparent relief print layer (P19) / polycarbonate film (F3) was obtained in the same manner as in Example 19.
- ZnS reffractive index: 2.3
- a transparent asperity print layer on the surface of the polycarbonate film (F3) of this laminate opposite to the surface on which the transparent asperity print layer (P19) was formed, a transparent asperity print layer (in plan view)
- a laminate of the color print decoration layer (P3) was obtained, and then, the glass plate (G1) was prevented from entering the air with the transparent double-sided tape (T1) on the color print decoration layer (P3) of this laminate.
- the obtained laminate is viewed from the side of the glass plate (G1), it looks like a faceted glass in which the surface is engraved on a colored glass, and the designability is obtained. it was high.
- a ZnS reflective layer (R3) / a transparent concavo-convex printed layer ((P19) / polycarbonate film (F3) / a color print decorative layer (P3) was obtained by the same method as in Example 22.
- this ZnS reflective layer (R3) A transparent double-sided tape (T1) on top of the glass plate (G1) so as to prevent air from entering, and having a laminated structure as shown in FIG. 20, glass plate (G1) / transparent double-sided tape (T1) / A laminate of ZnS reflective layer (R3) / transparent uneven print layer (P19) / polycarbonate film (F3) / color print decoration layer (P3) was obtained, and the obtained laminate was observed from the glass plate (G1) side. When it did, the appearance like a faceted glass with the colored layer which put engraving on colored glass was obtained, and the designability was high.
- Example 24 In the region on the other side of the transparent concavo-convex printing layer (P19) of the laminate obtained in Example 19 on the side opposite to the side with the polycarbonate film (F3), in the region where the transparent concavo-convex printing layer (P19) is not formed in plan view Color printing decoration layer (P3) / transparent concavo-convex printing layer (P19) / polycarbonate film having a laminated structure as shown in FIG. 21 in which a blue color printing decoration layer (P3) is printed using a UV printer A laminate of (F3) / transparent double-sided tape (T1) / glass plate (G1) was obtained.
- Example 25 On the color print decoration layer (P3) of the laminate obtained in Example 24, 50 nm thick ZnS (refractive index: 2.3) was formed as a reflective layer by sputtering, and lamination as shown in FIG. A laminate of ZnS reflective layer (R3) / color print decoration layer (P3) / transparent uneven print layer (P19) / polycarbonate film (F3) / transparent double-sided tape (T1) / glass plate (G1) having a structure Obtained.
- ZnS reflective layer (R3) / color print decoration layer (P3) / transparent uneven print layer (P19) / polycarbonate film (F3) / transparent double-sided tape (T1) / glass plate (G1) having a structure Obtained.
- the laminate of the present invention is a building member such as a window material, a floor material, a wall material, a ceiling material, an interior member such as a table top, an exterior material of white goods such as a washing machine and a refrigerator, a mobile phone, a portable information terminal It can be preferably used for applications such as electronic devices such as (PDA).
- PDA electronic devices
- 1A to 1H laminate, 11: translucent substrate, 12: translucent member, 20: uneven layer, 21: convex portion, 21A to 21C: pole of curved portion, 30: reflective layer, 40, 41: Decorative layer, 50: translucent resin film, BP: curved portion, CP: connection portion, LP1: first straight portion, LP2: second straight portion
Landscapes
- Laminated Bodies (AREA)
Abstract
Provided is a laminated body design properties superior to those in the prior art. A laminated body (1A) that includes a translucent base material (11) and an uneven layer (20) having a plurality of plan-view line-shaped protrusions on the surface thereof, the uneven layer (20) having a pattern in plan view in which the line-shaped protrusions, which have curved sections having a degree of curvature of 30-150°, are multiply formed with gaps therebetween, and the ratio (S/L) of the gaps (S) between the plurality of protrusions to the line width (L) of the protrusions being 10 or less. The protrusions preferably include first straight-line sections facing in a first direction and second straight-line sections facing in a second direction, the first straight-line sections and second straight-line sections being smoothly connected via the curved sections in plan view.
Description
本発明は、積層体に関する。
The present invention relates to a laminate.
ガラス板は、耐久性が高く、表面が平滑で、質感、反射等により意匠性が高く、建築物、インテリア等に広く用いられている。さらに、近年、窓材、床材、壁材、天井材等の建築部材;テーブル天板等のインテリア部材;洗濯機、冷蔵庫等の白物家電の外装材;携帯電話、携帯情報端末(PDA)等の電子機器等の用途において、より意匠性の高いガラス材が求められるようになってきている。今後さらに、意匠性の高いガラス材の用途は拡大していくことが予想される。
The glass plate has high durability, a smooth surface, high designability due to texture, reflection and the like, and is widely used in buildings, interiors and the like. Furthermore, in recent years, building members such as windows, floors, walls and ceilings; interior members such as table tops; exterior materials for white goods such as washing machines and refrigerators; mobile phones, personal digital assistants (PDAs) In applications such as electronic devices, glass materials having higher designability are being sought. In the future, it is expected that the applications of glass materials with high designability will be expanded.
かかる背景下、内部に、印刷PET(ポリエチレンテレフタレート)フィルム、和紙等の紙、布、金属、大理石、木材、押し花、葉脈等のガラス以外の異種素材を封入した合わせガラスが提案されている。かかる合わせガラスは、ガラス板/透光性樹脂膜(中間膜)/異種素材/透光性樹脂膜(中間膜)/ガラス板の5層構造を基本とし、表側のガラス板を通して異種素材を視認することで、美観に優れた意匠を実現することができる。
異種素材は、色、模様、パターン等を有し、意匠層として機能することができる。例えば、特許文献1には、ガラス板/接着性フィルム/突板裏打シート/接着性フィルム/ガラス板を積層成形してなる5層構造の積層体が開示されている(特許文献1参照)。 Under such a background, laminated glass in which a different material other than glass such as printed PET (polyethylene terephthalate) film, paper such as Japanese paper, cloth, metal, marble, wood, pressed flowers, veins and the like is enclosed is proposed. This laminated glass is based on a five-layer structure of glass plate / translucent resin film (interlayer film) / different material / translucent resin film (interlayer film) / glass plate, and different materials are viewed through the glass plate on the front side By doing this, it is possible to realize a design excellent in aesthetics.
The dissimilar material has a color, a pattern, a pattern, and the like, and can function as a design layer. For example,Patent Document 1 discloses a laminate having a five-layer structure formed by laminating and forming a glass plate / adhesive film / a base plate backing sheet / adhesive film / glass plate (see Patent Document 1).
異種素材は、色、模様、パターン等を有し、意匠層として機能することができる。例えば、特許文献1には、ガラス板/接着性フィルム/突板裏打シート/接着性フィルム/ガラス板を積層成形してなる5層構造の積層体が開示されている(特許文献1参照)。 Under such a background, laminated glass in which a different material other than glass such as printed PET (polyethylene terephthalate) film, paper such as Japanese paper, cloth, metal, marble, wood, pressed flowers, veins and the like is enclosed is proposed. This laminated glass is based on a five-layer structure of glass plate / translucent resin film (interlayer film) / different material / translucent resin film (interlayer film) / glass plate, and different materials are viewed through the glass plate on the front side By doing this, it is possible to realize a design excellent in aesthetics.
The dissimilar material has a color, a pattern, a pattern, and the like, and can function as a design layer. For example,
上記積層体において、裏側のガラス板は必須ではない。また、ガラス板の代わりに、透光性樹脂板等の任意の透光性基材を用いてもよい。透光性基材と意匠層とを含む積層体においては、各種製品の高付加価値化に伴い、より高度な意匠性が求められるようになってきている。
In the said laminated body, the glass plate on the back side is not essential. Moreover, you may use arbitrary translucent base materials, such as a translucent resin board, instead of a glass plate. In a laminate including a translucent substrate and a design layer, more advanced design is required as the value added of various products is increased.
本発明は上記事情に鑑みてなされたものであり、従来よりも意匠性に優れた積層体の提供を目的とする。
This invention is made in view of the said situation, and aims at provision of the laminated body excellent in the designability conventionally.
本発明の積層体は、
透光性基材と表面に複数の平面視ライン状の凸部を有する凹凸層とを含む積層体であって、
前記凹凸層は平面視にて、曲げ角度が30~150°である曲部を有するライン状の前記凸部が間隔を空けて複数形成されたパターンを有し、
前記凸部の線幅(L)に対する前記複数の凸部の間隔(S)の比(S/L)が10以下を特徴とするものである。 The laminate of the present invention is
A laminate comprising: a translucent base material; and a concavo-convex layer having a plurality of convex portions in the form of lines in a plan view on the surface,
The concavo-convex layer has a pattern in which a plurality of linear convex parts having a curved part with a bending angle of 30 to 150 degrees are formed at intervals with a space in a plan view,
A ratio (S / L) of an interval (S) of the plurality of convex portions to a line width (L) of the convex portion is 10 or less.
透光性基材と表面に複数の平面視ライン状の凸部を有する凹凸層とを含む積層体であって、
前記凹凸層は平面視にて、曲げ角度が30~150°である曲部を有するライン状の前記凸部が間隔を空けて複数形成されたパターンを有し、
前記凸部の線幅(L)に対する前記複数の凸部の間隔(S)の比(S/L)が10以下を特徴とするものである。 The laminate of the present invention is
A laminate comprising: a translucent base material; and a concavo-convex layer having a plurality of convex portions in the form of lines in a plan view on the surface,
The concavo-convex layer has a pattern in which a plurality of linear convex parts having a curved part with a bending angle of 30 to 150 degrees are formed at intervals with a space in a plan view,
A ratio (S / L) of an interval (S) of the plurality of convex portions to a line width (L) of the convex portion is 10 or less.
本発明の積層体は、凹凸層に含まれる複数の凸部の曲部が連なった部分が手前または奥に膨らんでいるように立体的に視認され、透光性基材の厚み以上の奥行が感じられ、従来よりも意匠性に優れる。
The layered product of the present invention is three-dimensionally recognized so that the portion where the curved portions of the plurality of convex portions included in the concavo-convex layer are in a row swells in the front or back, and the depth greater than the thickness of the translucent substrate It is felt and it is superior in design than before.
薄膜構造体は、一般的に、厚み等に応じて、「フィルム」、「シート」等と称される。本明細書では、これらを特に区別せず、これらを包括する概念を表す用語として「フィルム」の用語を使用するものとする。
The thin film structure is generally referred to as "film", "sheet" or the like depending on the thickness and the like. In the present specification, the term "film" shall be used as a term that expresses the concept encompassing them without making any distinction between them.
以下、本発明の実施の形態を説明する。
図1A、図2~図8は、本発明に係る第1~第8実施形態の積層体を示す模式断面図である。これらの図において、同じ構成要素には同じ参照符号を付してある。
図1Aに示す第1実施形態の積層体1Aは、透光性基材11の一方の面(図示上面)上に、表面に凹凸を有する凹凸層20が形成された積層構造を有する。凹凸層20は透光性基材11と反対側の表面(図示上面)に凹凸を有している。
図2に示す第2実施形態の積層体1Bは、透光性基材11上に、表面に凹凸を有する凹凸層20と、凹凸層20の表面凹凸に沿って形成された反射層30とが順次形成された積層構造を有する。
第1、第2実施形態の積層体1A、1B、および後記第3~第5実施形態の積層体1C~1Eでは、透光性基材11側(図示下側)が観察者側である。 Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described.
FIGS. 1A and 2 to 8 are schematic cross-sectional views showing the laminates of the first to eighth embodiments according to the present invention. In these figures, identical components are given the same reference numerals.
Laminatedbody 1A of 1st Embodiment shown to FIG. 1A has the laminated structure where the uneven | corrugated layer 20 which has an unevenness | corrugation in the surface was formed on one side (in the illustration upper surface) of the translucent base material 11. FIG. The uneven layer 20 has unevenness on the surface (upper surface in the drawing) opposite to the light transmitting substrate 11.
Thelaminate 1B according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 2 includes a light-transmissive substrate 11 having a concavo-convex layer 20 having concavities and convexities on the surface, and a reflective layer 30 formed along the concavo-convex surface of the concavo-convex layer 20. It has a laminated structure formed sequentially.
In the laminates 1A and 1B of the first and second embodiments and the laminates 1C to 1E of the third to fifth embodiments described later, the translucent substrate 11 side (the lower side in the drawing) is the viewer side.
図1A、図2~図8は、本発明に係る第1~第8実施形態の積層体を示す模式断面図である。これらの図において、同じ構成要素には同じ参照符号を付してある。
図1Aに示す第1実施形態の積層体1Aは、透光性基材11の一方の面(図示上面)上に、表面に凹凸を有する凹凸層20が形成された積層構造を有する。凹凸層20は透光性基材11と反対側の表面(図示上面)に凹凸を有している。
図2に示す第2実施形態の積層体1Bは、透光性基材11上に、表面に凹凸を有する凹凸層20と、凹凸層20の表面凹凸に沿って形成された反射層30とが順次形成された積層構造を有する。
第1、第2実施形態の積層体1A、1B、および後記第3~第5実施形態の積層体1C~1Eでは、透光性基材11側(図示下側)が観察者側である。 Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described.
FIGS. 1A and 2 to 8 are schematic cross-sectional views showing the laminates of the first to eighth embodiments according to the present invention. In these figures, identical components are given the same reference numerals.
Laminated
The
In the
透光性基材11としては、ガラス板、透光性樹脂板、透光性樹脂フィルム、これらの組合せ等が挙げられる。透光性基材11は、単層構造でも積層構造でもよく、表面処理等の処理が施されたものでもよい。
ガラス板は公知のものを使用でき、ソーダライムガラス、ホウケイ酸ガラス、無アルカリガラス等が挙げられる。ガラス板は、表面に反射防止(AR)処理、眩光防止層(AG)、防指紋(AFP)処理、防汚処理、抗菌処理等の公知の表面処理が施されたものでもよい。ガラス板は、強化加工等の公知の二次加工処理が施されたものでもよい。
透光性樹脂板および透光性樹脂フィルムの構成樹脂としては、アクリル系樹脂;塩化ビニル系樹脂;カーボネート系樹脂;エポキシ系樹脂;ポリエチレン、ポリプロピレン等のオレフィン系樹脂;スチロール系樹脂;ABS系樹脂等のスチレン系樹脂;ナイロン等のアミド系樹脂;フッ素系樹脂;フェノール系樹脂;メラミン系樹脂;エステル系樹脂、これらの組合せ等が挙げられる。 Examples of thetranslucent substrate 11 include a glass plate, a translucent resin plate, a translucent resin film, a combination thereof, and the like. The light-transmissive substrate 11 may have a single-layer structure or a laminated structure, or may be subjected to a treatment such as surface treatment.
A well-known thing can be used for a glass plate, and soda lime glass, borosilicate glass, an alkali free glass, etc. are mentioned. The glass plate may be subjected to known surface treatment such as anti-reflection (AR) treatment, antiglare layer (AG) treatment, anti-fingerprint (AFP) treatment, antifouling treatment, anti-bacterial treatment, etc. on the surface. The glass plate may be one subjected to known secondary processing such as reinforcement processing.
Acrylic resin; vinyl chloride resin; carbonate resin; epoxy resin; olefin resin such as polyethylene and polypropylene; styrene resin; ABS resin Styrene resins such as; amide resins such as nylon; fluorine resins; phenol resins; melamine resins; ester resins; combinations thereof, and the like.
ガラス板は公知のものを使用でき、ソーダライムガラス、ホウケイ酸ガラス、無アルカリガラス等が挙げられる。ガラス板は、表面に反射防止(AR)処理、眩光防止層(AG)、防指紋(AFP)処理、防汚処理、抗菌処理等の公知の表面処理が施されたものでもよい。ガラス板は、強化加工等の公知の二次加工処理が施されたものでもよい。
透光性樹脂板および透光性樹脂フィルムの構成樹脂としては、アクリル系樹脂;塩化ビニル系樹脂;カーボネート系樹脂;エポキシ系樹脂;ポリエチレン、ポリプロピレン等のオレフィン系樹脂;スチロール系樹脂;ABS系樹脂等のスチレン系樹脂;ナイロン等のアミド系樹脂;フッ素系樹脂;フェノール系樹脂;メラミン系樹脂;エステル系樹脂、これらの組合せ等が挙げられる。 Examples of the
A well-known thing can be used for a glass plate, and soda lime glass, borosilicate glass, an alkali free glass, etc. are mentioned. The glass plate may be subjected to known surface treatment such as anti-reflection (AR) treatment, antiglare layer (AG) treatment, anti-fingerprint (AFP) treatment, antifouling treatment, anti-bacterial treatment, etc. on the surface. The glass plate may be one subjected to known secondary processing such as reinforcement processing.
Acrylic resin; vinyl chloride resin; carbonate resin; epoxy resin; olefin resin such as polyethylene and polypropylene; styrene resin; ABS resin Styrene resins such as; amide resins such as nylon; fluorine resins; phenol resins; melamine resins; ester resins; combinations thereof, and the like.
透光性基材11のJIS R3106(1998)に準拠して測定される可視光透過率は、好ましくは80%以上、より好ましくは85%以上、特に好ましくは90%以上である。
透光性基材11の表面粗さ(JIS B 0601(2001)に準拠して測定される算術平均粗さRa)は、好ましくは10nm以下、より好ましくは5nm以下、さらに好ましくは2nm以下である。
透光性基材11の透明性および表面粗さは上記規定に制限されず、眩光防止、艶消し等の凹凸形成処理が施されたものでもよい。
透光性基材11の厚みは、好ましくは0.01~20mm、より好ましくは0.05~10mm、特に好ましくは0.15~5mmである。
透光性基材11は、平板状の他、円筒状、時計皿状等の3次元曲面を有するものでもよい。
具体的な方法については後記するが、透光性基材11は、凹凸層20を形成した金属等からなる凹凸基板上に透光性材料を成形したものであってもよい。 The visible light transmittance of the light-transmissive substrate 11 measured in accordance with JIS R 3106 (1998) is preferably 80% or more, more preferably 85% or more, and particularly preferably 90% or more.
The surface roughness of the light-transmissive substrate 11 (arithmetic mean roughness Ra measured according to JIS B 0601 (2001)) is preferably 10 nm or less, more preferably 5 nm or less, still more preferably 2 nm or less .
The transparency and surface roughness of the light-transmissive substrate 11 are not limited to the above specifications, and may be subjected to an unevenness forming process such as glare prevention and matting.
The thickness of the light-transmissive substrate 11 is preferably 0.01 to 20 mm, more preferably 0.05 to 10 mm, and particularly preferably 0.15 to 5 mm.
The light-transmissive substrate 11 may have a three-dimensional curved surface such as a cylindrical shape, a watch glass shape or the like in addition to a flat shape.
Although a specific method will be described later, the light-transmissive substrate 11 may be obtained by molding a light-transmissive material on a concavo-convex substrate made of metal or the like on which the concavo-convex layer 20 is formed.
透光性基材11の表面粗さ(JIS B 0601(2001)に準拠して測定される算術平均粗さRa)は、好ましくは10nm以下、より好ましくは5nm以下、さらに好ましくは2nm以下である。
透光性基材11の透明性および表面粗さは上記規定に制限されず、眩光防止、艶消し等の凹凸形成処理が施されたものでもよい。
透光性基材11の厚みは、好ましくは0.01~20mm、より好ましくは0.05~10mm、特に好ましくは0.15~5mmである。
透光性基材11は、平板状の他、円筒状、時計皿状等の3次元曲面を有するものでもよい。
具体的な方法については後記するが、透光性基材11は、凹凸層20を形成した金属等からなる凹凸基板上に透光性材料を成形したものであってもよい。 The visible light transmittance of the light-
The surface roughness of the light-transmissive substrate 11 (arithmetic mean roughness Ra measured according to JIS B 0601 (2001)) is preferably 10 nm or less, more preferably 5 nm or less, still more preferably 2 nm or less .
The transparency and surface roughness of the light-
The thickness of the light-
The light-
Although a specific method will be described later, the light-
図1Bに凹凸層20の表層部の部分拡大模式断面図を示すように、凹凸層20は透光性基材11と反対側の表面(図示上面)に、複数の平面視ライン状の凸部21とそれらの間隙に形成された凹部とからなる凹凸パターンを有している。図中、符号Lは凸部の線幅、符号Hは凸部の高さ、符号Sは複数の凸部の間隔である。
As a partially enlarged schematic cross-sectional view of the surface layer portion of the concavo-convex layer 20 is shown in FIG. 1B, the concavo-convex layer 20 has a plurality of convex portions in the form of lines in plan view on the surface opposite to the translucent substrate 21 has a concavo-convex pattern consisting of the concave portions 21 and concave portions formed in the gaps between them. In the drawing, reference symbol L denotes a line width of the convex portion, reference symbol H denotes a height of the convex portion, and reference symbol S denotes an interval between the plurality of convex portions.
凹凸層20は平面視にて、曲げ角度が30~150°である、少なくとも1つ、好ましくは複数の曲部を有するライン状の凸部21が間隔を空けて複数形成されたパターンを有する。曲部の曲げ角度は、好ましくは50~130°、より好ましくは70~110°、特に好ましくは90°である。
凸部21の線幅(L)に対する複数の凸部21の間隔(S)の比(S/L)は10以下、好ましくは3以下、より好ましくは1以下、特に好ましくは0.5以下である。
凸部21の線幅(L)と複数の凸部21の間隔(S)との和(L+S)は、好ましくは200μm以下であり、より好ましくは80μm以下である。L+Sが80μm以下であれば、ライン状の凸部が視認できなくなり、意匠性が向上する。L+Sの下限は特に限定されないが、L+Sは製造上5μm以上となる。 凸部21が複数の曲部を含む場合、曲部の曲率半径(R)に対する互いに隣り合う曲部の極点間の距離(D)の比(D/R)は好ましくは150以下、より好ましくは0.1~50、特に好ましくは0.5~10、最も好ましくは1~8である。 The concavo-convex layer 20 has a pattern in which a plurality of linear convex parts 21 having at least one, preferably a plurality of curved parts having a bending angle of 30 to 150 ° in plan view are formed at intervals. The bending angle of the curved portion is preferably 50 to 130 °, more preferably 70 to 110 °, and particularly preferably 90 °.
The ratio (S / L) of the spacing (S) of the plurality ofprojections 21 to the line width (L) of the projections 21 is 10 or less, preferably 3 or less, more preferably 1 or less, particularly preferably 0.5 or less is there.
The sum (L + S) of the line width (L) of theconvex portion 21 and the spacing (S) of the plural convex portions 21 is preferably 200 μm or less, and more preferably 80 μm or less. When L + S is 80 μm or less, the line-shaped convex portion can not be visually recognized, and the designability is improved. The lower limit of L + S is not particularly limited, but L + S is 5 μm or more in manufacture. When the convex portion 21 includes a plurality of curved portions, the ratio (D / R) of the distance (D) between the poles of the adjacent curved portions to the radius of curvature (R) of the curved portions is preferably 150 or less, more preferably It is 0.1 to 50, particularly preferably 0.5 to 10, and most preferably 1 to 8.
凸部21の線幅(L)に対する複数の凸部21の間隔(S)の比(S/L)は10以下、好ましくは3以下、より好ましくは1以下、特に好ましくは0.5以下である。
凸部21の線幅(L)と複数の凸部21の間隔(S)との和(L+S)は、好ましくは200μm以下であり、より好ましくは80μm以下である。L+Sが80μm以下であれば、ライン状の凸部が視認できなくなり、意匠性が向上する。L+Sの下限は特に限定されないが、L+Sは製造上5μm以上となる。 凸部21が複数の曲部を含む場合、曲部の曲率半径(R)に対する互いに隣り合う曲部の極点間の距離(D)の比(D/R)は好ましくは150以下、より好ましくは0.1~50、特に好ましくは0.5~10、最も好ましくは1~8である。 The concavo-
The ratio (S / L) of the spacing (S) of the plurality of
The sum (L + S) of the line width (L) of the
凸部21の断面形状は特に制限されず、例えば図1Bに示すように、逆半(楕)円状等が好ましい。凸部21の断面形状は、矩形状、台形状、またはこれらの面取り形状であってもよい。
凸部21の高さは特に制限されず、凸部21の線幅(L)に対する凸部の高さ(H)の比(H/L)は、好ましくは0.01~100、より好ましくは0.1~10、特に好ましくは0.2~5である。 The cross-sectional shape of theconvex portion 21 is not particularly limited, and, for example, as shown in FIG. 1B, a reverse half (elliptical) or the like is preferable. The cross-sectional shape of the convex portion 21 may be rectangular, trapezoidal, or chamfered shape thereof.
The height of theprojections 21 is not particularly limited, and the ratio (H / L) of the height (H) of the projections to the line width (L) of the projections 21 is preferably 0.01 to 100, and more preferably It is 0.1 to 10, particularly preferably 0.2 to 5.
凸部21の高さは特に制限されず、凸部21の線幅(L)に対する凸部の高さ(H)の比(H/L)は、好ましくは0.01~100、より好ましくは0.1~10、特に好ましくは0.2~5である。 The cross-sectional shape of the
The height of the
図1Cに、1つの凸部21の平面パターンの一例を示す。図1Cにおいて、符号BPは曲げ角度が30~150°である曲部、符号21A、21B、21Cは曲部の極点、符号CPは曲部に接続される接続部である。図1Cに示す凸部21では、互いに隣り合う曲部の極点間の距離(D)は、極点21A、21B間の距離、または、極点21B、21Cの距離である。
FIG. 1C shows an example of a planar pattern of one convex portion 21. In FIG. 1C, reference numeral BP denotes a curved portion having a bending angle of 30 to 150 °, reference numerals 21A, 21B and 21C denote poles of the curved portion, and reference numeral CP denotes a connection portion connected to the curved portion. In the convex portion 21 shown in FIG. 1C, the distance (D) between the poles of the curved portions adjacent to each other is the distance between the poles 21A and 21B or the distance between the poles 21B and 21C.
曲部BPに接続される接続部CPは、曲線部でも直線部でもよい。
図1Cに示すように、一態様において、凹凸層20は平面視にて、曲部BPを介して接続された第1の方向に向かう第1の曲線部と第2の方向に向かう第2の曲線部とを含むライン状の凸部21が間隔を空けて複数形成されたパターンを有することができる。
他の態様において、凹凸層20は平面視にて、曲部BPを介してなめらかに接続された第1の方向に向かう第1の直線部と第2の方向に向かう第2の直線部とを含むライン状の凸部21が間隔を空けて複数形成されたパターンを有することができる。 The connection portion CP connected to the curved portion BP may be a curved portion or a straight portion.
As shown in FIG. 1C, in one aspect, theuneven layer 20 has a first curved portion directed in a first direction and a second directed in a second direction connected via the curved portion BP in a plan view. It can have a pattern in which a plurality of linear convex portions 21 including a curved portion are formed at intervals.
In another aspect, the concavo-convex layer 20 has a first linear portion directed in a first direction smoothly connected via the curved portion BP and a second linear portion directed in a second direction in plan view. It is possible to have a pattern in which a plurality of linear convex portions 21 including an opening are formed at intervals.
図1Cに示すように、一態様において、凹凸層20は平面視にて、曲部BPを介して接続された第1の方向に向かう第1の曲線部と第2の方向に向かう第2の曲線部とを含むライン状の凸部21が間隔を空けて複数形成されたパターンを有することができる。
他の態様において、凹凸層20は平面視にて、曲部BPを介してなめらかに接続された第1の方向に向かう第1の直線部と第2の方向に向かう第2の直線部とを含むライン状の凸部21が間隔を空けて複数形成されたパターンを有することができる。 The connection portion CP connected to the curved portion BP may be a curved portion or a straight portion.
As shown in FIG. 1C, in one aspect, the
In another aspect, the concavo-
上記のように、ライン状の凸部21は、1つの曲部BPに接続された、曲線部または直線部からなり異なる方向に向かう第1、第2の接続部CPを含むことができる。ライン状の凸部21は、接続部CPを含まなくてもよい。
本明細書において、曲げ角度は、次のように定義される。
第1または第2の接続部CPが曲線部である場合、第1または第2の曲部BPと接続部CPとの変曲点における接線を求める。第1または第2の接続部CPが直線部である場合、第1または第2の直線部の延長線を求める。曲部BPに接続部CPが接続されない場合、曲部BPの端点における接線を求める。曲部を挟んで一方の側にある接線または延長線と他方の側にある接線または延長線とのなす角度を曲げ角度と定義する。 As described above, the line-shapedconvex portion 21 can include the first and second connection portions CP which are connected to one curved portion BP and which are curved portions or linear portions and directed in different directions. The linear convex portion 21 may not include the connection portion CP.
In the present specification, the bending angle is defined as follows.
When the first or second connection portion CP is a curved portion, a tangent at the inflection point between the first or second bending portion BP and the connection portion CP is obtained. If the first or second connection portion CP is a straight portion, an extension line of the first or second straight portion is obtained. When the connection portion CP is not connected to the bending portion BP, a tangent at an end point of the bending portion BP is obtained. The angle between the tangent or extension on one side of the bend and the tangent or extension on the other side is defined as the bending angle.
本明細書において、曲げ角度は、次のように定義される。
第1または第2の接続部CPが曲線部である場合、第1または第2の曲部BPと接続部CPとの変曲点における接線を求める。第1または第2の接続部CPが直線部である場合、第1または第2の直線部の延長線を求める。曲部BPに接続部CPが接続されない場合、曲部BPの端点における接線を求める。曲部を挟んで一方の側にある接線または延長線と他方の側にある接線または延長線とのなす角度を曲げ角度と定義する。 As described above, the line-shaped
In the present specification, the bending angle is defined as follows.
When the first or second connection portion CP is a curved portion, a tangent at the inflection point between the first or second bending portion BP and the connection portion CP is obtained. If the first or second connection portion CP is a straight portion, an extension line of the first or second straight portion is obtained. When the connection portion CP is not connected to the bending portion BP, a tangent at an end point of the bending portion BP is obtained. The angle between the tangent or extension on one side of the bend and the tangent or extension on the other side is defined as the bending angle.
凹凸層20の材質は特に制限されない。ただし、透光性基材11と凹凸層20との界面での反射を防ぐため、透光性基材11と凹凸層20との間の屈折率差は小さい方が好ましい。具体的には、該屈折率差は好ましくは0.3以内、より好ましくは0.2以内、特に好ましくは0.1以内、最も好ましくは0.05以内である。
凹凸層20は、好ましくは透光性樹脂を含むことができる。凹凸層20の透過率は好ましくは70%以上、より好ましくは80%以上、特に好ましくは90%以上である。
凹凸層20の形成方法は特に制限されず、フレキソ印刷、オフセット印刷、グラビア印刷、スクリーン印刷等の一般的な印刷方法により形成することができる。印刷には例えば、光硬化性樹脂を含む光硬化型インク(紫外線(UV)硬化型インク等)を用いることができる。例えば、ミマキエンジニアリング社製のUVプリンター「UJF-6042MkII」を用いて、ガラス板、透光性樹脂板、透光性樹脂フィルム等の透光性基材上に凹凸層を印刷することができる。この方法では、低コストな材料である印刷インクを用いて、簡易なプロセスで凹凸層を形成することができる。この方法では、パターン設計およびパターン変更も容易である。 The material of theuneven layer 20 is not particularly limited. However, in order to prevent reflection at the interface between the light transmitting substrate 11 and the uneven layer 20, the difference in refractive index between the light transmitting substrate 11 and the uneven layer 20 is preferably as small as possible. Specifically, the refractive index difference is preferably 0.3 or less, more preferably 0.2 or less, particularly preferably 0.1 or less, and most preferably 0.05 or less.
Theuneven layer 20 can preferably contain a translucent resin. The transmittance of the uneven layer 20 is preferably 70% or more, more preferably 80% or more, and particularly preferably 90% or more.
The formation method in particular of the uneven |corrugated layer 20 is not restrict | limited, It can form by common printing methods, such as a flexographic printing, an offset printing, a gravure, screen printing. For printing, for example, a photocurable ink (such as an ultraviolet (UV) curable ink) containing a photocurable resin can be used. For example, the uneven layer can be printed on a light transmitting substrate such as a glass plate, a light transmitting resin plate, a light transmitting resin film or the like using a UV printer “UJF-6042MkII” manufactured by Mimaki Engineering. In this method, the uneven layer can be formed by a simple process using a printing ink which is a low cost material. In this method, pattern design and pattern change are also easy.
凹凸層20は、好ましくは透光性樹脂を含むことができる。凹凸層20の透過率は好ましくは70%以上、より好ましくは80%以上、特に好ましくは90%以上である。
凹凸層20の形成方法は特に制限されず、フレキソ印刷、オフセット印刷、グラビア印刷、スクリーン印刷等の一般的な印刷方法により形成することができる。印刷には例えば、光硬化性樹脂を含む光硬化型インク(紫外線(UV)硬化型インク等)を用いることができる。例えば、ミマキエンジニアリング社製のUVプリンター「UJF-6042MkII」を用いて、ガラス板、透光性樹脂板、透光性樹脂フィルム等の透光性基材上に凹凸層を印刷することができる。この方法では、低コストな材料である印刷インクを用いて、簡易なプロセスで凹凸層を形成することができる。この方法では、パターン設計およびパターン変更も容易である。 The material of the
The
The formation method in particular of the uneven |
凹凸層20用の透光性樹脂としては特に制限されず、フェノール樹脂、ユリア樹脂、メラミン樹脂、アルキッド樹脂、不飽和ポリエステル樹脂、エポキシ樹脂、ジアリルフタレート樹脂、ポリウレタン樹脂、シリコーン樹脂等の一般的な熱硬化性樹脂を使用することができる。熱硬化性樹脂を使用する場合は例えば、複数の凸部をパターン印刷した後、熱硬化させることにより凹凸層20が得られる。
また、透光性樹脂には、ポリエチレン樹脂、ポリプロピレン樹脂、ポリ塩化ビニリデン樹脂、ポリエチレンテレフタレート樹脂、ポリアミド樹脂、ポリアセタール樹脂、ポリブチレンテレフタレート樹脂、ポリフェニレンサルファイド樹脂、ポリエーテルエーテルケトン樹脂、液晶ポリマー樹脂、ポリイミド樹脂、アクリロニトリルブタジエンスチレン樹脂、ポリスチレン樹脂、ポリメタクリル酸メチル樹脂、ポリ塩化ビニル樹脂、ポリカーボネート樹脂、変性ポリフェニリンエーテル樹脂、ポリサルフォン樹脂、ポリアリレート樹脂、ポリアミドイミド樹脂、ポリエーテルイミド樹脂等の一般的な熱可塑性樹脂を使用することができる。熱可塑性樹脂を使用する場合は例えば、平坦な透光性樹脂層を形成した後、表面に凹凸のある型を押し当てて透光性樹脂層を加熱することにより、凹凸層20が得られる。透光性樹脂層の加熱のタイミングは、型を押し当てる前でもよい。 The light-transmitting resin for theuneven layer 20 is not particularly limited, and is generally a phenol resin, a urea resin, a melamine resin, an alkyd resin, an unsaturated polyester resin, an epoxy resin, a diallyl phthalate resin, a polyurethane resin, a silicone resin, etc. Thermosetting resins can be used. In the case of using a thermosetting resin, for example, after the plurality of convex portions are pattern-printed, the uneven layer 20 is obtained by thermosetting.
In addition, as the translucent resin, polyethylene resin, polypropylene resin, polyvinylidene chloride resin, polyethylene terephthalate resin, polyamide resin, polyacetal resin, polybutylene terephthalate resin, polyphenylene sulfide resin, polyether ether ketone resin, liquid crystal polymer resin, polyimide Resin, acrylonitrile butadiene styrene resin, polystyrene resin, polymethyl methacrylate resin, polyvinyl chloride resin, polycarbonate resin, modified polyphenyrin ether resin, polysulfone resin, polyarylate resin, polyamide imide resin, polyether imide resin, etc. Thermoplastic resins can be used. When using a thermoplastic resin, for example, after forming a flat translucent resin layer, the uneven |corrugated layer 20 is obtained by pressing the type | mold with an unevenness | corrugation on the surface and heating a translucent resin layer. The timing of heating of the translucent resin layer may be before pressing the mold.
また、透光性樹脂には、ポリエチレン樹脂、ポリプロピレン樹脂、ポリ塩化ビニリデン樹脂、ポリエチレンテレフタレート樹脂、ポリアミド樹脂、ポリアセタール樹脂、ポリブチレンテレフタレート樹脂、ポリフェニレンサルファイド樹脂、ポリエーテルエーテルケトン樹脂、液晶ポリマー樹脂、ポリイミド樹脂、アクリロニトリルブタジエンスチレン樹脂、ポリスチレン樹脂、ポリメタクリル酸メチル樹脂、ポリ塩化ビニル樹脂、ポリカーボネート樹脂、変性ポリフェニリンエーテル樹脂、ポリサルフォン樹脂、ポリアリレート樹脂、ポリアミドイミド樹脂、ポリエーテルイミド樹脂等の一般的な熱可塑性樹脂を使用することができる。熱可塑性樹脂を使用する場合は例えば、平坦な透光性樹脂層を形成した後、表面に凹凸のある型を押し当てて透光性樹脂層を加熱することにより、凹凸層20が得られる。透光性樹脂層の加熱のタイミングは、型を押し当てる前でもよい。 The light-transmitting resin for the
In addition, as the translucent resin, polyethylene resin, polypropylene resin, polyvinylidene chloride resin, polyethylene terephthalate resin, polyamide resin, polyacetal resin, polybutylene terephthalate resin, polyphenylene sulfide resin, polyether ether ketone resin, liquid crystal polymer resin, polyimide Resin, acrylonitrile butadiene styrene resin, polystyrene resin, polymethyl methacrylate resin, polyvinyl chloride resin, polycarbonate resin, modified polyphenyrin ether resin, polysulfone resin, polyarylate resin, polyamide imide resin, polyether imide resin, etc. Thermoplastic resins can be used. When using a thermoplastic resin, for example, after forming a flat translucent resin layer, the uneven |
図1Aおよび図2に示す例では、凹凸層20は透光性基材11とは別部材であるが、公知方法にて透光性基材11の表層部を凹凸加工して、凹凸加工した表層部を凹凸層20としてもよい。
図1Aおよび図2に示す例は、予め用意した透光性基材11上に凹凸層20を形成した例であるが、表面に公知の表面凹凸加工を施して凹凸層20を形成した金属等からなる凹凸基板を用意し、この表面凹凸上に透光性基材11を成形してもよい。凹凸基板上への透光性基材11の成形法としては、凹凸基板上に、熱溶融させたガラスフリットまたは透光性樹脂を付与し、冷却固化して、透光性基材11を成形する方法;凹凸基板上に、透光性樹脂を溶媒に溶解させた樹脂溶液を塗工し、加熱乾燥、減圧乾燥、減圧加熱乾燥等により乾燥させて、透光性基材11を成形する方法;凹凸基板上に、モノマー、オリゴマー、プレポリマー等の透光性樹脂の前駆体を含む液状の硬化性組成物を塗工し、加熱、または、紫外線、電子線等の活性エネルギー線照射により硬化させて、透光性基材11を成形する方法等が挙げられる。 In the example shown in FIG. 1A and FIG. 2, although the concavo-convex layer 20 is a separate member from the translucent substrate 11, the surface layer portion of the translucent substrate 11 is concavo-convex processed and concavo-convex processed by a known method The surface layer portion may be the uneven layer 20.
Although the example shown in FIG. 1A and FIG. 2 is an example in which the concavo-convex layer 20 is formed on the translucent base material 11 prepared in advance, the metal etc. The uneven | corrugated substrate which consists of these may be prepared, and the translucent base material 11 may be shape | molded on this surface asperity. As a molding method of the translucent base material 11 on an uneven | corrugated board | substrate, the glass frit or translucent resin heat-melted is provided on an uneven | corrugated board | substrate, it cools and solidifies, and the translucent base material 11 is shape | molded. Method of coating a resin solution in which a translucent resin is dissolved in a solvent is coated on a concavo-convex substrate and dried by heating drying, reduced pressure drying, reduced pressure heating drying, etc. to form the translucent substrate 11 A liquid curable composition containing a precursor of a light transmitting resin such as a monomer, an oligomer, or a prepolymer is coated on a concavo-convex substrate and cured by heating or irradiation with an active energy ray such as ultraviolet light or electron beam And a method of forming the light-transmissive substrate 11 and the like.
図1Aおよび図2に示す例は、予め用意した透光性基材11上に凹凸層20を形成した例であるが、表面に公知の表面凹凸加工を施して凹凸層20を形成した金属等からなる凹凸基板を用意し、この表面凹凸上に透光性基材11を成形してもよい。凹凸基板上への透光性基材11の成形法としては、凹凸基板上に、熱溶融させたガラスフリットまたは透光性樹脂を付与し、冷却固化して、透光性基材11を成形する方法;凹凸基板上に、透光性樹脂を溶媒に溶解させた樹脂溶液を塗工し、加熱乾燥、減圧乾燥、減圧加熱乾燥等により乾燥させて、透光性基材11を成形する方法;凹凸基板上に、モノマー、オリゴマー、プレポリマー等の透光性樹脂の前駆体を含む液状の硬化性組成物を塗工し、加熱、または、紫外線、電子線等の活性エネルギー線照射により硬化させて、透光性基材11を成形する方法等が挙げられる。 In the example shown in FIG. 1A and FIG. 2, although the concavo-
Although the example shown in FIG. 1A and FIG. 2 is an example in which the concavo-
凹凸層20の表面凹凸に沿って形成される反射層30の材質は、凹凸層20と反射層30との界面で光を効果的に反射できるものであればよく、凹凸層20との屈折率差が0.4以上の高屈折率材料および/または金属が好ましい。凹凸層20と高屈折率材料の屈折率差は大きいほど反射率が大きくなり、得られる積層体は立体的に視認されやすくなる。凹凸層20と高屈折率材料の屈折率差は、より好ましくは0.6以上、特に好ましくは0.8以上である。該屈折率差の上限は特に限定されないが、通常、1.5以下である。
The material of the reflective layer 30 formed along the surface unevenness of the uneven layer 20 may be any material that can effectively reflect light at the interface between the uneven layer 20 and the reflective layer 30, and the refractive index with the uneven layer 20 High refractive index materials and / or metals with a difference of 0.4 or more are preferred. The larger the difference in refractive index between the uneven layer 20 and the high refractive index material, the higher the reflectance, and the resulting laminate is likely to be viewed three-dimensionally. The refractive index difference between the uneven layer 20 and the high refractive index material is more preferably 0.6 or more, particularly preferably 0.8 or more. The upper limit of the refractive index difference is not particularly limited, but is usually 1.5 or less.
反射層30に用いて好適な金属としては、Mg、Zn、Al、Ga、In、Y、La、Ce、Pr、Nd、Ti、Zr、Sn、Fe、Co、Ni、V、Nb、Ta、Cr、Mo、W、Mn、Cu、Ag、Au、Pd、およびPtからなる群より選ばれる少なくとも1種の元素からなる金属単体または合金が好ましい。中でも反射率が大きいため、Alおよび/またはAgが好ましい。
反射層30に用いて好適な高屈折率材料としては、TiO2、ZrO2、ZnO、Nb2O5、Ta2O5、Al2O3、In2O3、SnO2、ZnS、およびDLC(ダイヤモンドライクカーボン)からなる群より選ばれる少なくとも1種の材料が好ましい。中でも材料が安価であるため、TiO2、Nb2O5、およびZnOからなる群より選ばれる少なくとも1種の材料が好ましい。 As metals suitable for use in thereflective layer 30, Mg, Zn, Al, Ga, In, Y, La, Ce, Pr, Nd, Ti, Zr, Sn, Fe, Co, Ni, V, Nb, Ta, It is preferable to use an elemental metal or alloy consisting of at least one element selected from the group consisting of Cr, Mo, W, Mn, Cu, Ag, Au, Pd, and Pt. Among them, Al and / or Ag are preferable because the reflectance is large.
Preferred high refractive index materials used for the reflective layer 30, TiO 2, ZrO 2, ZnO, Nb 2 O 5, Ta 2 O 5, Al 2 O 3, In 2 O 3, SnO 2, ZnS, and DLC At least one material selected from the group consisting of (diamond like carbon) is preferred. Among them, at least one material selected from the group consisting of TiO 2 , Nb 2 O 5 , and ZnO is preferable because the material is inexpensive.
反射層30に用いて好適な高屈折率材料としては、TiO2、ZrO2、ZnO、Nb2O5、Ta2O5、Al2O3、In2O3、SnO2、ZnS、およびDLC(ダイヤモンドライクカーボン)からなる群より選ばれる少なくとも1種の材料が好ましい。中でも材料が安価であるため、TiO2、Nb2O5、およびZnOからなる群より選ばれる少なくとも1種の材料が好ましい。 As metals suitable for use in the
Preferred high refractive index materials used for the reflective layer 30, TiO 2, ZrO 2, ZnO, Nb 2 O 5, Ta 2 O 5, Al 2 O 3, In 2 O 3, SnO 2, ZnS, and DLC At least one material selected from the group consisting of (diamond like carbon) is preferred. Among them, at least one material selected from the group consisting of TiO 2 , Nb 2 O 5 , and ZnO is preferable because the material is inexpensive.
反射層30の形成方法は特に制限されず、スパッタ法、蒸着法等の気相法;塗布法;印刷法等の公知の方法を適用することができる。
反射層30は屈折率が異なる複数の膜の積層構造としてもよい。この場合、反射層30は光干渉膜となり、反射率が高められる場合がある。例えば、TiO2とSiO2とを交互に成膜することにより、光干渉膜が容易に得られる。
反射層30は、凹凸層20の表面の全体または一部の上に形成することができる。積層体1Bを携帯電話等の電子機器に用いる場合、積層体1Bは電波を透過することが求められる。一般的に、金属からなる反射層30を含む積層体1Bは電波の透過性が悪化する傾向があるが、反射層30を凹凸層20の表面上に部分的に形成することにより、電波の透過性を改善することができる。 The method for forming thereflective layer 30 is not particularly limited, and a known method such as a vapor phase method such as a sputtering method or an evaporation method; a coating method; a printing method or the like can be applied.
Thereflective layer 30 may have a laminated structure of a plurality of films having different refractive indexes. In this case, the reflective layer 30 may be a light interference film, and the reflectance may be increased. For example, an optical interference film can be easily obtained by depositing TiO 2 and SiO 2 alternately.
Thereflective layer 30 can be formed on all or part of the surface of the uneven layer 20. When the laminate 1B is used in an electronic device such as a mobile phone, the laminate 1B is required to transmit radio waves. Generally, the laminate 1B including the reflective layer 30 made of metal tends to deteriorate the radio wave permeability, but by partially forming the reflective layer 30 on the surface of the uneven layer 20, the radio wave can be transmitted. I can improve the sex.
反射層30は屈折率が異なる複数の膜の積層構造としてもよい。この場合、反射層30は光干渉膜となり、反射率が高められる場合がある。例えば、TiO2とSiO2とを交互に成膜することにより、光干渉膜が容易に得られる。
反射層30は、凹凸層20の表面の全体または一部の上に形成することができる。積層体1Bを携帯電話等の電子機器に用いる場合、積層体1Bは電波を透過することが求められる。一般的に、金属からなる反射層30を含む積層体1Bは電波の透過性が悪化する傾向があるが、反射層30を凹凸層20の表面上に部分的に形成することにより、電波の透過性を改善することができる。 The method for forming the
The
The
反射層30を有しない第1実施形態の積層体1Aでは、透光性基材11側から入射した光が凹凸層20の表面凹凸と空気との界面で反射され、反射像が視認される。反射層30を有する第2実施形態の積層体1Bでは、透光性基材11側から入射した光が凹凸層20の表面凹凸と反射層30との界面で反射され、反射像が視認される。
In the laminate 1A according to the first embodiment which does not have the reflective layer 30, light incident from the side of the light transmissive substrate 11 is reflected at the interface between the surface irregularities of the uneven layer 20 and air, and the reflected image is viewed. In the laminate 1B of the second embodiment having the reflective layer 30, light incident from the side of the light transmissive substrate 11 is reflected at the interface between the surface irregularities of the uneven layer 20 and the reflective layer 30, and a reflected image is viewed .
透光性基材11側から入射した光は、平面視にて、ライン状の凸部21の線幅方向に主として反射され、線幅方向に対して垂直方向にはほとんど反射されない。また、平面視にて、ライン状の凸部21が間隔を空けて複数形成される場合、ライン状の凸部21の線幅方向と線幅方向に対して垂直方向とのコントラストがより大きくなる。また、凸部21の曲げ角度が平面視にて30~150°である場合、曲部を境にして凸部の延びる方向が有意に変わり、曲部を境にしてコントラストが有意に生じる。このコントラストは、曲げ角度が90°に近くなる程、大きくなる傾向がある。このコントラストにより複数の曲部BPが連なった部分は手前側または奥側に膨らんでいるように立体的に視認される。手前側と奥側のどちらに視認されるかは、光源と積層体と観察者の位置関係によって決まる。
The light incident from the side of the light transmitting substrate 11 is mainly reflected in the line width direction of the line-shaped convex portion 21 in plan view, and is hardly reflected in the direction perpendicular to the line width direction. In addition, when a plurality of linear convex portions 21 are formed spaced apart in a plan view, the contrast in the line width direction of the linear convex portions 21 and the direction perpendicular to the line width direction becomes larger. . In addition, when the bending angle of the convex portion 21 is 30 to 150 ° in plan view, the extending direction of the convex portion is significantly changed at the curved portion, and the contrast is significantly generated at the curved portion. This contrast tends to increase as the bending angle approaches 90 °. Due to this contrast, the portion where the plurality of curved portions BP are connected is visually recognized in a three-dimensional manner so as to bulge toward the near side or the far side. It is determined by the positional relationship between the light source, the laminate, and the observer whether the light is viewed on the front side or the back side.
図9A~図9Cに示す3つの写真は、第2実施形態の積層体の一例の表面写真の例であり、同じサンプルに対して倍率を変えて撮像した写真である。
図9A~図9Cに示す積層体は、平面視にて、曲部BPを介してなめらかに接続された第1の方向(図示斜め右上方向)に向かう第1の直線部LP1と第2の方向(図示斜め右下方向)に向かう第2の直線部LP2とからなるパターンを図示左右方向に連続的に繰り返し有するライン状の複数の凸部(図9B、図9Cにおいてライン状に白く見える部分)が、ほぼ等間隔で図示上下方向に周期的に形成された凹凸層を含む。
なお、図9A~図9Cに示す写真は凹凸層上に形成された反射層の表面写真であるが、この反射層の表面凹凸は凹凸層の表面凹凸に対応している。
図9A~図9Cに示す積層体では、凹凸層20に含まれる複数の凸部の曲部BPが連なった部分は手前側または奥側に膨らんでいるように立体的に視認され、透光性基材11の厚み以上の奥行が感じられ、従来よりも意匠性に優れる。 The three photographs shown in FIGS. 9A to 9C are examples of surface photographs of an example of the laminate of the second embodiment, and are photographs of the same sample taken at different magnifications.
The laminate shown in FIGS. 9A to 9C has a first straight portion LP1 and a second direction directed in a first direction (diagonally upper right direction in the figure) smoothly connected via the curved portion BP in a plan view. A plurality of line-shaped convex portions having a pattern consisting of a second straight portion LP2 directed toward (the oblique lower right direction in the figure) continuously repeated in the horizontal direction in the figure (a portion which looks white in lines in FIGS. 9B and 9C) But includes uneven layers formed periodically at equal intervals in the vertical direction in the drawing.
The photographs shown in FIGS. 9A to 9C are photographs of the surface of the reflective layer formed on the uneven layer, and the surface unevenness of the reflective layer corresponds to the surface unevenness of the uneven layer.
In the laminated body shown in FIGS. 9A to 9C, the portion where the curved portions BP of the plurality of convex portions included in the concavo-convex layer 20 are continuous is visually recognized three-dimensionally as if swelling on the front side or the back side. A depth greater than the thickness of the base material 11 is felt, and the designability is superior to that of the prior art.
図9A~図9Cに示す積層体は、平面視にて、曲部BPを介してなめらかに接続された第1の方向(図示斜め右上方向)に向かう第1の直線部LP1と第2の方向(図示斜め右下方向)に向かう第2の直線部LP2とからなるパターンを図示左右方向に連続的に繰り返し有するライン状の複数の凸部(図9B、図9Cにおいてライン状に白く見える部分)が、ほぼ等間隔で図示上下方向に周期的に形成された凹凸層を含む。
なお、図9A~図9Cに示す写真は凹凸層上に形成された反射層の表面写真であるが、この反射層の表面凹凸は凹凸層の表面凹凸に対応している。
図9A~図9Cに示す積層体では、凹凸層20に含まれる複数の凸部の曲部BPが連なった部分は手前側または奥側に膨らんでいるように立体的に視認され、透光性基材11の厚み以上の奥行が感じられ、従来よりも意匠性に優れる。 The three photographs shown in FIGS. 9A to 9C are examples of surface photographs of an example of the laminate of the second embodiment, and are photographs of the same sample taken at different magnifications.
The laminate shown in FIGS. 9A to 9C has a first straight portion LP1 and a second direction directed in a first direction (diagonally upper right direction in the figure) smoothly connected via the curved portion BP in a plan view. A plurality of line-shaped convex portions having a pattern consisting of a second straight portion LP2 directed toward (the oblique lower right direction in the figure) continuously repeated in the horizontal direction in the figure (a portion which looks white in lines in FIGS. 9B and 9C) But includes uneven layers formed periodically at equal intervals in the vertical direction in the drawing.
The photographs shown in FIGS. 9A to 9C are photographs of the surface of the reflective layer formed on the uneven layer, and the surface unevenness of the reflective layer corresponds to the surface unevenness of the uneven layer.
In the laminated body shown in FIGS. 9A to 9C, the portion where the curved portions BP of the plurality of convex portions included in the concavo-
凹凸層20は、上記したように、曲げ角度が30~150°である少なくとも1つ、好ましくは複数の曲部を有する。曲部の曲げ角度は、好ましくは50~130°、より好ましくは70~110°、特に好ましくは90°である。凸部21の線幅(L)に対する複数の凸部21の間隔(S)の比(S/L)は10以下、好ましくは3以下である。凸部21が複数の曲部を含む場合、曲部の曲率半径(R)に対する互いに隣り合う曲部の極点間の距離(D)の比(D/R)は好ましくは150以下、より好ましくは0.1~50、特に好ましくは0.5~10、最も好ましくは1~8である。
凹凸層20が上記条件を充足する場合、コントラストの発生と立体視が効果的に発現し、凹凸層20に含まれる複数の凸部21の曲部BPが連なった部分は手前側または奥側に膨らんでいるように立体的に視認され、透光性基材11の厚み以上の奥行が感じられ、従来よりも意匠性に優れた積層体1A、1Bを提供することができる。 As described above, the concavo-convex layer 20 has at least one, preferably a plurality of curved portions with a bending angle of 30 to 150 °. The bending angle of the curved portion is preferably 50 to 130 °, more preferably 70 to 110 °, and particularly preferably 90 °. The ratio (S / L) of the spacing (S) of the plurality of projections 21 to the line width (L) of the projections 21 is 10 or less, preferably 3 or less. When the convex portion 21 includes a plurality of curved portions, the ratio (D / R) of the distance (D) between the poles of the adjacent curved portions to the radius of curvature (R) of the curved portions is preferably 150 or less, more preferably It is 0.1 to 50, particularly preferably 0.5 to 10, and most preferably 1 to 8.
When the concavo-convex layer 20 satisfies the above conditions, the occurrence of contrast and stereoscopic vision are effectively expressed, and the portion where the curved portions BP of the plurality of convex portions 21 included in the concavo-convex layer 20 are connected is on the front side or the back side The laminates 1A and 1B can be provided such that they are visually recognized in a three-dimensional manner so as to expand, have a depth greater than the thickness of the light-transmissive substrate 11, and are superior in design to conventional ones.
凹凸層20が上記条件を充足する場合、コントラストの発生と立体視が効果的に発現し、凹凸層20に含まれる複数の凸部21の曲部BPが連なった部分は手前側または奥側に膨らんでいるように立体的に視認され、透光性基材11の厚み以上の奥行が感じられ、従来よりも意匠性に優れた積層体1A、1Bを提供することができる。 As described above, the concavo-
When the concavo-
互いに隣り合う曲部BPを接続する接続部CPは、直線部を含むことが好ましい。上述のとおり、透光性基材11側から入射した光は、平面視にて、ライン状の凸部21の線幅方向に主として反射され、線幅方向に対して垂直方向にはほとんど反射されない。接続部CPが直線部を含む場合、曲部BPと直線部は線幅方向が異なるため、異なる反射特性を示し、曲部BPと直線部との間を境にしてコントラストが有意に生じる。このコントラストにより複数の曲部BPが連なった部分は手前側または奥側に膨らんでいるように立体的に視認されやすい。また、曲部の曲率半径(R)に対する第1の直線部または第2の直線部の長さの比が150以下であれば、複数の曲部BPが連なった部分が手前側または奥側に膨らんでいるように立体的に視認されやすい。
It is preferable that the connection portion CP connecting the adjacent curved portions BP includes a linear portion. As described above, light incident from the side of the light transmissive substrate 11 is mainly reflected in the line width direction of the line-shaped convex portion 21 in plan view, and is hardly reflected in the direction perpendicular to the line width direction. . When the connection portion CP includes a linear portion, the curved portion BP and the linear portion have different reflection characteristics because the line width direction is different, and a contrast is significantly generated at the boundary between the curved portion BP and the linear portion. Due to this contrast, a portion in which a plurality of curved portions BP are connected is likely to be viewed three-dimensionally as if it bulges to the front side or the back side. In addition, if the ratio of the length of the first straight portion or the second straight portion to the radius of curvature (R) of the curved portion is 150 or less, the portion where the plurality of curved portions BP are connected is the front side or the back side It is easy to be seen three-dimensionally as if it were swollen.
図9A~図9Cに示した凹凸パターンでは、図10に概略を示すように、第1の方向(図示斜め右上方向)に向かう複数の第1の直線部LP1または複数の第1の曲線部が形成される複数の領域A1と、第2の方向(図示斜め右下方向)に向かう複数の第2の直線部LP2または複数の第2の曲線部が形成される複数の領域A2とが図示左右方向に交互にストライプパターンで配置されている。
凹凸層20は、複数の第1の直線部LP1または複数の第1の曲線部が形成される1つ以上の領域A1と、複数の第2の直線部LP2または複数の第2の曲線部が形成される1つ以上の領域A2とを有することができ、1つ以上の領域A1と1つ以上の領域A2の配置は適宜設計変更することができる。
凹凸層20における、複数の第1の直線部LP1または複数の第1の曲線部が形成される1つ以上の領域A1と、複数の第2の直線部LP2または複数の第2の曲線部が形成される1つ以上の領域A2との他の配置例を、図11、図12に示す。
なお、図10~図12において、領域A1と領域A2との境界部分には、曲部BPの形成領域がある(図示略)。 In the concavo-convex pattern shown in FIGS. 9A to 9C, as schematically shown in FIG. 10, the plurality of first straight portions LP1 or the plurality of first curved portions toward the first direction (the obliquely upper right direction in the drawing) A plurality of regions A1 to be formed and a plurality of regions A2 in which a plurality of second straight portions LP2 or a plurality of second curved portions toward the second direction (in the lower right direction in the drawing) are formed It is arranged in a stripe pattern alternately in the direction.
Theuneven layer 20 includes one or more regions A1 in which a plurality of first linear portions LP1 or a plurality of first curved portions are formed, and a plurality of second linear portions LP2 or a plurality of second curved portions. There can be one or more regions A2 to be formed, and the arrangement of the one or more regions A1 and the one or more regions A2 can be appropriately changed in design.
In theuneven layer 20, one or more regions A1 in which the plurality of first linear portions LP1 or the plurality of first curved portions are formed, and the plurality of second linear portions LP2 or the plurality of second curved portions Another arrangement example with the one or more regions A2 to be formed is shown in FIG. 11 and FIG.
In FIG. 10 to FIG. 12, there is a formation area of the curved portion BP (not shown) at the boundary between the area A1 and the area A2.
凹凸層20は、複数の第1の直線部LP1または複数の第1の曲線部が形成される1つ以上の領域A1と、複数の第2の直線部LP2または複数の第2の曲線部が形成される1つ以上の領域A2とを有することができ、1つ以上の領域A1と1つ以上の領域A2の配置は適宜設計変更することができる。
凹凸層20における、複数の第1の直線部LP1または複数の第1の曲線部が形成される1つ以上の領域A1と、複数の第2の直線部LP2または複数の第2の曲線部が形成される1つ以上の領域A2との他の配置例を、図11、図12に示す。
なお、図10~図12において、領域A1と領域A2との境界部分には、曲部BPの形成領域がある(図示略)。 In the concavo-convex pattern shown in FIGS. 9A to 9C, as schematically shown in FIG. 10, the plurality of first straight portions LP1 or the plurality of first curved portions toward the first direction (the obliquely upper right direction in the drawing) A plurality of regions A1 to be formed and a plurality of regions A2 in which a plurality of second straight portions LP2 or a plurality of second curved portions toward the second direction (in the lower right direction in the drawing) are formed It is arranged in a stripe pattern alternately in the direction.
The
In the
In FIG. 10 to FIG. 12, there is a formation area of the curved portion BP (not shown) at the boundary between the area A1 and the area A2.
本発明によれば、透光性基材に彫刻を入れずに切子ガラスのような外観を呈する積層体を提供することができる。
図13~図16に、切子ガラスのように見える凹凸層の複数の凸部21のパターンの例を示す。積層体には、図13~図16に示すようなパターンを1つまたは2つ以上形成することができる。
図13~図16に示す態様の凹凸層のパターンは、平面視にて、曲部BPを介してなめらかに接続された第1の方向に向かう第1の直線部LP1と第2の方向に向かう第2の直線部LP2とからなるライン状の複数の凸部21が、等しいピッチで周期的に形成された凸部群を有する。
凹凸層は平面視にて、間隔を空けて複数形成された凸部21の曲部BPが直線状に連なった凸部群を含むことができ、好ましくは1つの中心部から互いに重なり合わずに複数の径方向に延びる複数の凸部群を含むことができる。
間隔を空けて複数形成された凸部21の曲部BPが直線状に連なる方向の異なる複数の凸部群がある場合、間隔を空けて複数形成された凸部21の曲部BPが直線状に連なった部分が手前側または奥側に膨らんでいるように立体的に視認されやすく、好ましい。 According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a laminate having an appearance like a facet glass without engraving the light-transmissive substrate.
FIGS. 13 to 16 show examples of patterns of the plurality ofconvex portions 21 of the concavo-convex layer which looks like a facet glass. In the laminate, one or more patterns as shown in FIGS. 13 to 16 can be formed.
The pattern of the concavo-convex layer of the aspect shown in FIGS. 13 to 16 is a first straight portion LP1 directed to the first direction smoothly connected via the curved portion BP and a second direction in plan view. A plurality of line-shapedconvex portions 21 formed of the second linear portion LP2 have a convex portion group formed periodically at equal pitches.
The concavo-convex layer can include a convex portion group in which the curved portions BP of the plurality ofconvex portions 21 formed at intervals are linearly continued in plan view, and preferably from one central portion without overlapping each other A plurality of radially extending convex groups may be included.
In the case where there are a plurality of convex portion groups having different directions in which the curved portions BP of the plurality ofconvex portions 21 formed at a plurality of intervals are linearly connected, the curved portions BP of the plurality of convex portions 21 formed at a plurality of intervals are linear. It is easy to be visually recognized in three dimensions so that the part which continued in a line swells to the near side or back side, and is preferable.
図13~図16に、切子ガラスのように見える凹凸層の複数の凸部21のパターンの例を示す。積層体には、図13~図16に示すようなパターンを1つまたは2つ以上形成することができる。
図13~図16に示す態様の凹凸層のパターンは、平面視にて、曲部BPを介してなめらかに接続された第1の方向に向かう第1の直線部LP1と第2の方向に向かう第2の直線部LP2とからなるライン状の複数の凸部21が、等しいピッチで周期的に形成された凸部群を有する。
凹凸層は平面視にて、間隔を空けて複数形成された凸部21の曲部BPが直線状に連なった凸部群を含むことができ、好ましくは1つの中心部から互いに重なり合わずに複数の径方向に延びる複数の凸部群を含むことができる。
間隔を空けて複数形成された凸部21の曲部BPが直線状に連なる方向の異なる複数の凸部群がある場合、間隔を空けて複数形成された凸部21の曲部BPが直線状に連なった部分が手前側または奥側に膨らんでいるように立体的に視認されやすく、好ましい。 According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a laminate having an appearance like a facet glass without engraving the light-transmissive substrate.
FIGS. 13 to 16 show examples of patterns of the plurality of
The pattern of the concavo-convex layer of the aspect shown in FIGS. 13 to 16 is a first straight portion LP1 directed to the first direction smoothly connected via the curved portion BP and a second direction in plan view. A plurality of line-shaped
The concavo-convex layer can include a convex portion group in which the curved portions BP of the plurality of
In the case where there are a plurality of convex portion groups having different directions in which the curved portions BP of the plurality of
図13に示す態様のパターン2Xは、間隔を空けて複数形成された凸部21の曲部BPが中心点から異なる方向に延びる第1~第4の直線LA1~LA4に沿って連なった第1~第4の凸部群22A~22Dを含む。これら4つの凸部群22A~22Dは、1つの中心部から互いに重なり合わずに異なる径方向(計4方向)に延びている。これら4つの凸部群22A~22Dは、最大幅が同一である。第1~第4の直線LA1~LA4の交点が中心点であり、中心点およびその近傍部分が中心部である。第1~第4の直線LA1~LA4は、90°等間隔で放射状に延びている。
図13中、符号Wmaxは、凸部群の最大幅(複数の凸部からなる1つの凸部群を1つの塊とみなしたときの最大幅)である。符号Rは、凸部群の径方向長さ(複数の凸部からなる1つの凸部群を1つの塊とみなしたときの凸部群の径方向長さ)である。 Thepattern 2X of the embodiment shown in FIG. 13 is formed by connecting the first to fourth straight lines LA1 to LA4 in which the curved portions BP of the plurality of convex portions 21 formed at intervals are extended from the center point in different directions. The fourth group of convex portions 22A to 22D are included. These four convex portion groups 22A to 22D extend in different radial directions (a total of four directions) from one central portion without overlapping each other. The four convex portions 22A to 22D have the same maximum width. The intersections of the first to fourth straight lines LA1 to LA4 are central points, and the central point and the vicinity thereof are central parts. The first to fourth straight lines LA1 to LA4 extend radially at equal intervals of 90 °.
In FIG. 13, the symbol W max is the maximum width of the convex portion group (maximum width when one convex portion group consisting of a plurality of convex portions is regarded as one mass). The symbol R denotes the radial length of the convex portion group (the radial length of the convex portion group when one convex portion group including a plurality of convex portions is regarded as one mass).
図13中、符号Wmaxは、凸部群の最大幅(複数の凸部からなる1つの凸部群を1つの塊とみなしたときの最大幅)である。符号Rは、凸部群の径方向長さ(複数の凸部からなる1つの凸部群を1つの塊とみなしたときの凸部群の径方向長さ)である。 The
In FIG. 13, the symbol W max is the maximum width of the convex portion group (maximum width when one convex portion group consisting of a plurality of convex portions is regarded as one mass). The symbol R denotes the radial length of the convex portion group (the radial length of the convex portion group when one convex portion group including a plurality of convex portions is regarded as one mass).
図14に示す態様のパターン3は、間隔を空けて複数形成された凸部21の曲部BPが中心点から異なる方向に延びる第1~第8の直線LB1~LB8に沿って連なった第1~第8の凸部群23A~23Hを含む。これら8つの凸部群23A~23Hは、1つの中心部から互いに重なり合わずに異なる径方向(計8方向)に延びている。これら8つの凸部群23A~23Hは、最大幅が同一である。第1~第8の直線LB1~LB8の交点が中心点であり、中心点およびその近傍部分が中心部である。第1~第8の直線LB1~LB8は、45°等間隔で放射状に延びている。
The pattern 3 of the embodiment shown in FIG. 14 is formed by connecting the first to eighth straight lines LB1 to LB8 in which the curved portions BP of the plurality of convex portions 21 formed at intervals are extended from the center point in different directions. Through eighth convex portions 23A-23H. These eight convex portion groups 23A to 23H extend in different radial directions (total eight directions) from one central portion without overlapping each other. The eight convex portions 23A to 23H have the same maximum width. The intersections of the first to eighth straight lines LB1 to LB8 are central points, and the central point and the vicinity thereof are central parts. The first to eighth straight lines LB1 to LB8 extend radially at 45 ° intervals.
1つの中心部から延びる凸部群の数は適宜変更することができ、例えば図15に示すパターン4のように、複数の凸部群は、1つの中心部から互いに重なり合わずに径方向に延びた36個の凸部群とすることもできる。この場合、各凸部群の中心線は、10°等間隔で放射状に延びている。図15の右下の図は、中心点およびその近傍の部分拡大図である。
The number of convex portions extending from one central portion can be changed as appropriate. For example, as in pattern 4 shown in FIG. 15, a plurality of convex portions are not overlapped from each other in the radial direction from one central portion. It can also be 36 extended convex groups. In this case, the center lines of the convex groups extend radially at equal intervals of 10 °. The lower right part of FIG. 15 is a partially enlarged view of the central point and the vicinity thereof.
互いに隣り合う第1の凸部群と第2の凸部群に着目し、第1の凸部群において、間隔を空けて複数形成された凸部の曲部が連なる方向を第1の直線方向とし、第2の凸部群において、間隔を空けて複数形成された凸部の前記曲部が連なる方向を第2の直線方向とし、第1の直線方向と第2の直線方向とのなす角をθとする。
立体的視認効果の観点から、θは、好ましくは10~170°、より好ましくは45~135°、さらに好ましくは80~100°、特に好ましくは90°である。
また、第1の凸部群と第2の凸部群との境界線が、第1の直線方向と第2の直線方向との交点から延びる第1の直線方向と第2の直線方向との二等分線または二等分線から±θ/4の範囲内の角度の直線に対して平行であることが好ましい。
このようにすることで、異なる方向に沿って形成された互いに隣り合う第1の凸部群と第2の凸部群とを違和感なく自然に繋ぐことができ、立体的視認が効果的となる。 Focusing on the first convex portion group and the second convex portion group adjacent to each other, in the first convex portion group, a direction in which the curved portions of the plurality of convex portions formed with a gap are continuous is a first linear direction In the second group of convex portions, a direction in which the curved portions of the plurality of convex portions formed at intervals are continuous is a second linear direction, and an angle formed by the first linear direction and the second linear direction. Let θ be.
From the viewpoint of three-dimensional visual effects, θ is preferably 10 to 170 °, more preferably 45 to 135 °, still more preferably 80 to 100 °, and particularly preferably 90 °.
In addition, a boundary between the first group of convex portions and the second group of convex portions extends from the intersection of the first linear direction and the second linear direction with the first linear direction and the second linear direction. It is preferable to be parallel to a bisector or a straight line of an angle within ± θ / 4 from the bisector.
By doing this, it is possible to naturally connect the first convex group and the second convex group adjacent to each other formed along different directions without discomfort, and three-dimensional visual recognition becomes effective. .
立体的視認効果の観点から、θは、好ましくは10~170°、より好ましくは45~135°、さらに好ましくは80~100°、特に好ましくは90°である。
また、第1の凸部群と第2の凸部群との境界線が、第1の直線方向と第2の直線方向との交点から延びる第1の直線方向と第2の直線方向との二等分線または二等分線から±θ/4の範囲内の角度の直線に対して平行であることが好ましい。
このようにすることで、異なる方向に沿って形成された互いに隣り合う第1の凸部群と第2の凸部群とを違和感なく自然に繋ぐことができ、立体的視認が効果的となる。 Focusing on the first convex portion group and the second convex portion group adjacent to each other, in the first convex portion group, a direction in which the curved portions of the plurality of convex portions formed with a gap are continuous is a first linear direction In the second group of convex portions, a direction in which the curved portions of the plurality of convex portions formed at intervals are continuous is a second linear direction, and an angle formed by the first linear direction and the second linear direction. Let θ be.
From the viewpoint of three-dimensional visual effects, θ is preferably 10 to 170 °, more preferably 45 to 135 °, still more preferably 80 to 100 °, and particularly preferably 90 °.
In addition, a boundary between the first group of convex portions and the second group of convex portions extends from the intersection of the first linear direction and the second linear direction with the first linear direction and the second linear direction. It is preferable to be parallel to a bisector or a straight line of an angle within ± θ / 4 from the bisector.
By doing this, it is possible to naturally connect the first convex group and the second convex group adjacent to each other formed along different directions without discomfort, and three-dimensional visual recognition becomes effective. .
図13に示す態様では、例えば、第1の凸部群は凸部群22Aであり、第2の凸部群は凸部群22Bであり、第1の直線方向は直線LA1の方向、第2の直線方向は直線LA2の方向であり、第1の凸部群と第2の凸部群との境界線は直線MA1の方向であることができる。この態様において、θは90°である。この態様では、複数の凸部群22A~22Dの最大幅が同一であるので、第1の凸部群と第2の凸部群との境界線MA1は、第1の直線方向と第2の直線方向との交点から延びる第1の直線方向と第2の直線方向との二等分線NA1と一致することができる。
In the embodiment shown in FIG. 13, for example, the first convex group is the convex group 22A, the second convex group is the convex group 22B, the first straight line direction is the direction of the straight line LA1, The straight line direction of is the direction of the straight line LA2, and the boundary between the first convex portion group and the second convex portion group can be the direction of the straight line MA1. In this embodiment, θ is 90 °. In this aspect, since the maximum widths of the plurality of convex portion groups 22A to 22D are the same, the boundary line MA1 between the first convex portion group and the second convex portion group is the first linear direction and the second linear direction. It can coincide with the bisector NA1 of the first linear direction and the second linear direction extending from the intersection with the linear direction.
図14に示す態様では例えば、第1の凸部群は凸部群23Aであり、第2の凸部群は凸部群23Bであり、第1の直線方向は直線LB1の方向、第2の直線方向は直線LB2の方向であり、第1の凸部群と第2の凸部群との境界線は直線MB1の方向であることができる。この態様において、θは45°である。この態様においても、複数の凸部群23A~23Hの最大幅が同一であるので、第1の凸部群と第2の凸部群との境界線MB1は、第1の直線方向と第2の直線方向との交点から延びる第1の直線方向と第2の直線方向との二等分線NB1と一致することができる。
In the embodiment shown in FIG. 14, for example, the first convex group is the convex group 23A, the second convex group is the convex group 23B, and the first straight line direction is the direction of the straight line LB1, the second straight line direction. The straight line direction may be the direction of the straight line LB2, and the boundary between the first convex portion group and the second convex portion group may be the direction of the straight line MB1. In this embodiment, θ is 45 °. Also in this aspect, since the maximum widths of the plurality of convex portion groups 23A to 23H are the same, the boundary line MB1 between the first convex portion group and the second convex portion group is the first linear direction and the second linear direction. And a bisector NB1 of a first linear direction and a second linear direction extending from the point of intersection with the linear direction.
図16に示す態様のパターン2Yは、図13に示す態様のパターン2Xにおいて、凸部群22B、22Dの最大幅を凸部群22A、22Cの最大幅よりも小さくした例である。この場合、第1の凸部群と第2の凸部群との境界線MA1は、第1の直線方向と第2の直線方向との交点から延びる第1の直線方向と第2の直線方向との二等分線NA1を平行移動させた直線となる。
The pattern 2Y of the aspect shown in FIG. 16 is an example in which the maximum width of the convex portions 22B and 22D is smaller than the maximum width of the convex portions 22A and 22C in the pattern 2X of the aspect shown in FIG. In this case, the boundary line MA1 between the first convex group and the second convex group is a first linear direction and a second linear direction extending from an intersection of the first linear direction and the second linear direction. And the bisecting line NA1 of the
図13~図16に示す態様のように、個々の凸部21の末端部21E(図13参照)は平面視にて、曲げ角度が105~165°の曲部であることが好ましい。個々の凸部21の末端部21Eを曲部とすることで、凸部の形成部分と非形成部分が自然に繋がったように視認され、好ましい。
As in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 13 to 16, it is preferable that the end portions 21E (see FIG. 13) of the individual convex portions 21 be curved portions having a bending angle of 105 to 165 ° in plan view. By forming the end portions 21E of the individual convex portions 21 as curved portions, it is preferable that the formed portions and the non-formed portions of the convex portions are visually recognized as being naturally connected.
図3に示す第3実施形態の積層体1Cのように、透光性基材11と凹凸層20との間に加飾層40を設けてもよい。
加飾層40は意匠性を高めるための層であり、色、模様、パターン等を有する透光性の層である。加飾層40の形成方法は特に制限されず、例えば、光硬化性樹脂を含む光硬化型インクを用いて、スクリーン印刷、インクジェット印刷等の公知方法により印刷する方法が好ましい。加飾層40は例えば、白黒またはカラーの印刷層であることができる。例えば、加飾層40として木目模様を印刷することで、高コストな天然素材である木材を用いることなく、低コストで木材を用いたような積層体を提供することができる。
第3実施形態の積層体1Cは、第2実施形態の積層体1Bと同様の基本構成を有し、第2実施形態の積層体1Bと同様の作用効果を奏することができる。第3実施形態の積層体1Cは、加飾層40を有することで、意匠性をより高めることが可能である。
反射層30を有する第3実施形態の積層体1Cでは、第2実施形態の積層体1Bと同様、透光性基材11側から入射した光が凹凸層20の表面凹凸と反射層30との界面で反射され、反射像が視認される。第3実施形態の積層体1Cにおいて、第1実施形態の積層体1Aと同様、反射層30を設けずに、透光性基材11側から入射した光を凹凸層20の表面凹凸と空気との界面で反射させるようにしてもよい。 Adecorative layer 40 may be provided between the translucent base 11 and the concavo-convex layer 20 as in a laminate 1 </ b> C of the third embodiment shown in FIG. 3.
Thedecorative layer 40 is a layer for enhancing design, and is a translucent layer having a color, a pattern, a pattern, and the like. The method for forming the decorative layer 40 is not particularly limited, and for example, a method of printing by a known method such as screen printing or inkjet printing using a photocurable ink containing a photocurable resin is preferable. The decorative layer 40 can be, for example, a black and white or color printing layer. For example, by printing a wood grain pattern as the decorative layer 40, it is possible to provide a laminate that uses wood at low cost without using wood that is a high-cost natural material.
The laminate 1C of the third embodiment has the same basic configuration as the laminate 1B of the second embodiment, and can exert the same effects as the laminate 1B of the second embodiment. Laminated body 1C of a 3rd embodiment can raise designability more by havingdecoration layer 40.
In the laminate 1C according to the third embodiment having thereflective layer 30, as in the laminate 1B according to the second embodiment, the light incident from the side of the light transmitting substrate 11 causes the surface irregularities of the uneven layer 20 and the reflective layer 30 The light is reflected at the interface, and the reflected image is viewed. In the laminate 1C according to the third embodiment, as in the case of the laminate 1A according to the first embodiment, the light incident from the side of the light transmitting substrate 11 is not provided with the reflective layer 30, and the surface irregularities of the uneven layer 20 and air. It may be made to reflect at the interface of
加飾層40は意匠性を高めるための層であり、色、模様、パターン等を有する透光性の層である。加飾層40の形成方法は特に制限されず、例えば、光硬化性樹脂を含む光硬化型インクを用いて、スクリーン印刷、インクジェット印刷等の公知方法により印刷する方法が好ましい。加飾層40は例えば、白黒またはカラーの印刷層であることができる。例えば、加飾層40として木目模様を印刷することで、高コストな天然素材である木材を用いることなく、低コストで木材を用いたような積層体を提供することができる。
第3実施形態の積層体1Cは、第2実施形態の積層体1Bと同様の基本構成を有し、第2実施形態の積層体1Bと同様の作用効果を奏することができる。第3実施形態の積層体1Cは、加飾層40を有することで、意匠性をより高めることが可能である。
反射層30を有する第3実施形態の積層体1Cでは、第2実施形態の積層体1Bと同様、透光性基材11側から入射した光が凹凸層20の表面凹凸と反射層30との界面で反射され、反射像が視認される。第3実施形態の積層体1Cにおいて、第1実施形態の積層体1Aと同様、反射層30を設けずに、透光性基材11側から入射した光を凹凸層20の表面凹凸と空気との界面で反射させるようにしてもよい。 A
The
The laminate 1C of the third embodiment has the same basic configuration as the laminate 1B of the second embodiment, and can exert the same effects as the laminate 1B of the second embodiment. Laminated body 1C of a 3rd embodiment can raise designability more by having
In the laminate 1C according to the third embodiment having the
加飾層40の形成位置は、適宜変更することができる。例えば、図4に示す第4実施形態の積層体1Dのように、反射層30の上に加飾層40を形成してもよい。この場合、加飾層40を透光性基材11側より視認できるように、反射層30は透光性を有することが好ましい。
第4実施形態の積層体1Dは、第2実施形態の積層体1Bと同様の基本構成を有し、第2実施形態の積層体1Bと同様の作用効果を奏することができる。 The formation position of thedecoration layer 40 can be changed suitably. For example, you may form the decoration layer 40 on the reflection layer 30 like laminated body 1D of 4th Embodiment shown in FIG. In this case, the reflective layer 30 preferably has translucency so that the decorative layer 40 can be viewed from the translucent substrate 11 side.
The laminate 1D of the fourth embodiment has the same basic configuration as the laminate 1B of the second embodiment, and can exert the same effects as the laminate 1B of the second embodiment.
第4実施形態の積層体1Dは、第2実施形態の積層体1Bと同様の基本構成を有し、第2実施形態の積層体1Bと同様の作用効果を奏することができる。 The formation position of the
The laminate 1D of the fourth embodiment has the same basic configuration as the laminate 1B of the second embodiment, and can exert the same effects as the laminate 1B of the second embodiment.
また、図5に示す第5実施形態の積層体1Eのように、透光性基材11と凹凸層20との間に第1の加飾層40を設け、さらに反射層30の上に第2の加飾層41を形成してもよい。
第5実施形態の積層体1Eは、第3実施形態の積層体1Cと同様の基本構成を有し、第3実施形態の積層体1Cと同様の作用効果を奏することができる。第5実施形態の積層体1Eは、2つの加飾層40、41を有することで、意匠性をより高めることができる。 In addition, as in a laminate 1E of the fifth embodiment shown in FIG. 5, a firstdecorative layer 40 is provided between the light transmitting substrate 11 and the concavo-convex layer 20, and the first decorative layer 40 is further formed on the reflective layer 30. Two decorative layers 41 may be formed.
The laminate 1E of the fifth embodiment has the same basic configuration as the laminate 1C of the third embodiment, and can exert the same effects as the laminate 1C of the third embodiment. Thelayered product 1E of a 5th embodiment can raise design nature more by having two decoration layers 40 and 41.
第5実施形態の積層体1Eは、第3実施形態の積層体1Cと同様の基本構成を有し、第3実施形態の積層体1Cと同様の作用効果を奏することができる。第5実施形態の積層体1Eは、2つの加飾層40、41を有することで、意匠性をより高めることができる。 In addition, as in a laminate 1E of the fifth embodiment shown in FIG. 5, a first
The laminate 1E of the fifth embodiment has the same basic configuration as the laminate 1C of the third embodiment, and can exert the same effects as the laminate 1C of the third embodiment. The
図6に示す第6実施形態の積層体1F、図7に示す第7実施形態の積層体1G、および図8に示す第8実施形態の積層体1Hは、透光性基材11の一方の面(図示上面)上に凹凸層20、反射層30、および必要に応じて加飾層40、41を形成した予備積層体PL1~PL3と、透光性部材12とが、透光性樹脂膜50を介して貼着されたものである。透光性樹脂膜50は、接着膜または粘着膜である。
透光性基材11としては、上記したように、ガラス板、透光性樹脂板、透光性樹脂フィルム、これらの組合せ等が挙げられる。透光性部材12としては透光性基材11と同様の材料を使用することができる。透光性基材11として透光性樹脂フィルムを用いる場合、いわゆるロールトゥロール(Roll to Roll)プロセスにより予備積層体PLを低コストに製造することが可能である。 The laminate 1F of the sixth embodiment shown in FIG. 6, the laminate 1G of the seventh embodiment shown in FIG. 7, and the laminate 1H of the eighth embodiment shown in FIG. The pre-laminates PL1 to PL3 in which the concavo-convex layer 20, the reflective layer 30, and the decorative layers 40 and 41 as necessary are formed on the surface (upper surface in the drawing), and the translucent member 12 It is pasted through 50. The translucent resin film 50 is an adhesive film or an adhesive film.
As above-mentioned as atranslucent base material 11, a glass plate, a translucent resin board, a translucent resin film, these combinations, etc. are mentioned. As the translucent member 12, the same material as the translucent substrate 11 can be used. When a translucent resin film is used as the translucent substrate 11, it is possible to manufacture the pre-laminate PL at a low cost by a so-called roll to roll process.
透光性基材11としては、上記したように、ガラス板、透光性樹脂板、透光性樹脂フィルム、これらの組合せ等が挙げられる。透光性部材12としては透光性基材11と同様の材料を使用することができる。透光性基材11として透光性樹脂フィルムを用いる場合、いわゆるロールトゥロール(Roll to Roll)プロセスにより予備積層体PLを低コストに製造することが可能である。 The laminate 1F of the sixth embodiment shown in FIG. 6, the laminate 1G of the seventh embodiment shown in FIG. 7, and the laminate 1H of the eighth embodiment shown in FIG. The pre-laminates PL1 to PL3 in which the concavo-
As above-mentioned as a
透光性樹脂膜50用の材料としては、エチレン・酢酸ビニル共重合体(EVA)、ポリビニルブチラール(PVB)等のポリビニルアセタール、アイオノマー等の1種以上の熱可塑性樹脂を含む合わせガラスの中間膜用の接着材料;アクリル系、ゴム系、ウレタン系、シリコーン系等の粘着性材料が好ましく用いられる。
透光性樹脂膜50用の材料の形態は好ましくは、EVAフィルム、PVBフィルム、アイオノマーフィルム等の熱可塑性樹脂フィルム;アクリル系、ゴム系、ウレタン系、シリコーン系等の透明粘着性フィルムである。フィルムを用いることで、予備積層体PL1~PL3と透光性部材12とを簡易に接着することができる。
なお、粘着剤を用いる場合、通常の使用環境下(常温常圧環境下)で透光性部材12の着脱を行うことができる。
透光性樹脂膜50は単層構造でも2層以上の複層構造であってもよい。透光性樹脂膜50は接着膜と粘着膜の積層構造であってもよい。例えば、熱可塑性のEVAフィルムの表面に、アクリル系、ゴム系、シリコーン系等の粘着膜が形成された積層構造の膜では、EVA膜が有する高い密着性と粘着膜が有する再剥離性(繰り返し貼着/剥離できる性質)とを有することができる。 As a material for thetranslucent resin film 50, an interlayer film of laminated glass containing one or more thermoplastic resins such as polyvinyl acetal such as ethylene / vinyl acetate copolymer (EVA), polyvinyl butyral (PVB), ionomer, etc. Adhesive materials for use; adhesive materials such as acrylics, rubbers, urethanes and silicones are preferably used.
The form of the material for thetranslucent resin film 50 is preferably a thermoplastic resin film such as an EVA film, a PVB film, or an ionomer film; a transparent adhesive film such as an acrylic, rubber, urethane, or silicone type. By using the film, the pre-laminates PL1 to PL3 and the light transmitting member 12 can be easily bonded.
In addition, when using an adhesive, attachment or detachment of thetranslucent member 12 can be performed in a normal use environment (under normal temperature normal pressure environment).
Thetranslucent resin film 50 may have a single layer structure or a multilayer structure of two or more layers. The translucent resin film 50 may have a laminated structure of an adhesive film and an adhesive film. For example, in a film having a laminated structure in which an acrylic, rubber or silicone adhesive film is formed on the surface of a thermoplastic EVA film, the high adhesion of the EVA film and the removability of the adhesive film (repeated It can have the property which can be stuck / peeled off.
透光性樹脂膜50用の材料の形態は好ましくは、EVAフィルム、PVBフィルム、アイオノマーフィルム等の熱可塑性樹脂フィルム;アクリル系、ゴム系、ウレタン系、シリコーン系等の透明粘着性フィルムである。フィルムを用いることで、予備積層体PL1~PL3と透光性部材12とを簡易に接着することができる。
なお、粘着剤を用いる場合、通常の使用環境下(常温常圧環境下)で透光性部材12の着脱を行うことができる。
透光性樹脂膜50は単層構造でも2層以上の複層構造であってもよい。透光性樹脂膜50は接着膜と粘着膜の積層構造であってもよい。例えば、熱可塑性のEVAフィルムの表面に、アクリル系、ゴム系、シリコーン系等の粘着膜が形成された積層構造の膜では、EVA膜が有する高い密着性と粘着膜が有する再剥離性(繰り返し貼着/剥離できる性質)とを有することができる。 As a material for the
The form of the material for the
In addition, when using an adhesive, attachment or detachment of the
The
透光性樹脂膜50は必要に応じて、着色剤を含むことができる。この場合、積層体は加飾層の色と透光性樹脂膜の色とが合わさった色を呈することができる。加飾層と透光性樹脂膜の色を自由に組み合わせることで、積層体の色の設計自由度が高まり、カラーバリエーションの展開も可能となる。着色剤としては公知のものを使用でき、顔料、染料、これらの組合せが挙げられる。
透光性樹脂膜50は必要に応じて、紫外線(UV)吸収剤を含むことができる。UV吸収剤により凹凸層20、反射層30、および加飾層40、41の紫外線による劣化を防ぐことできる。 Thetranslucent resin film 50 can contain a coloring agent as needed. In this case, the laminate can exhibit a color in which the color of the decorative layer and the color of the light-transmitting resin film are combined. By freely combining the color of the decorative layer and the light transmitting resin film, the degree of freedom in design of the color of the laminate is increased, and development of color variation is also possible. As a coloring agent, a well-known thing can be used and a pigment, dye, these combinations are mentioned.
Thetranslucent resin film 50 can contain an ultraviolet (UV) absorber as needed. The UV absorber can prevent deterioration of the uneven layer 20, the reflective layer 30, and the decorative layers 40, 41 due to ultraviolet light.
透光性樹脂膜50は必要に応じて、紫外線(UV)吸収剤を含むことができる。UV吸収剤により凹凸層20、反射層30、および加飾層40、41の紫外線による劣化を防ぐことできる。 The
The
図6に示す第6実施形態の積層体1Fでは、透光性部材12側(図示上側)が観察者側である。積層体1Fでは、透光性部材12側から入射した光が凹凸層20の表面凹凸と反射層30との界面で反射され、反射像が視認される。第6実施形態の積層体1Fは、第4実施形態の積層体1Dと同様の基本構成を有し、第4実施形態の積層体1Dと同様の作用効果を奏することができる。
図7に示す第7実施形態の積層体1Gのように、透光性基材11の一方の面(図示上面)上に加飾層40、凹凸層20、反射層30を順次形成して予備積層体としてもよい。
図8に示す第8実施形態の積層体1Hのように、透光性基材11の一方の面(図示上面)上に第1の加飾層40、凹凸層20、反射層30、第2の加飾層41を順次形成して予備積層体としてもよい。 In the laminate 1F according to the sixth embodiment shown in FIG. 6, thetranslucent member 12 side (upper side in the drawing) is the viewer side. In the laminate 1F, light incident from the light transmitting member 12 side is reflected at the interface between the surface asperity of the uneven layer 20 and the reflective layer 30, and a reflected image is visually recognized. The laminate 1F of the sixth embodiment has the same basic configuration as the laminate 1D of the fourth embodiment, and can exert the same effects as the laminate 1D of the fourth embodiment.
As in the laminate 1G of the seventh embodiment shown in FIG. 7, thedecorative layer 40, the concavo-convex layer 20, and the reflective layer 30 are sequentially formed on one surface (upper surface in the drawing) of the translucent substrate 11 It may be a laminate.
Like the laminate 1H of the eighth embodiment shown in FIG. 8, the firstdecorative layer 40, the concavo-convex layer 20, the reflective layer 30, and the second layer are formed on one surface (upper surface in the drawing) of the translucent substrate 11. The decorative layer 41 may be sequentially formed to be a preliminary laminate.
図7に示す第7実施形態の積層体1Gのように、透光性基材11の一方の面(図示上面)上に加飾層40、凹凸層20、反射層30を順次形成して予備積層体としてもよい。
図8に示す第8実施形態の積層体1Hのように、透光性基材11の一方の面(図示上面)上に第1の加飾層40、凹凸層20、反射層30、第2の加飾層41を順次形成して予備積層体としてもよい。 In the laminate 1F according to the sixth embodiment shown in FIG. 6, the
As in the laminate 1G of the seventh embodiment shown in FIG. 7, the
Like the laminate 1H of the eighth embodiment shown in FIG. 8, the first
第1~第8実施形態の積層体1A~1Hは、本発明の趣旨を逸脱しない限りにおいて、適宜設計変更が可能である。
凹凸層20、反射層30、加飾層40、41、透光性樹脂膜50は、必要に応じて、任意の添加剤を含むことができる。
積層体1A~1Hは、必要に応じて、上記以外の任意の要素を含むことができ、また、適宜構成を変更することが可能である。
例えば、図17に示す積層体1Iのように、観察者側から順に、透光性部材12、透光性樹脂膜50、透光性基材11、凹凸層20を備える積層体であってもよい。
また、図18に示す積層体1Jのように、観察者側から順に、透光性部材12、透光性樹脂膜50、透光性基材11、凹凸層20、反射層30を備える積層体であってもよい。 Thelaminates 1A to 1H of the first to eighth embodiments can be appropriately changed in design without departing from the scope of the present invention.
The concavo-convex layer 20, the reflective layer 30, the decorative layers 40 and 41, and the translucent resin film 50 can contain any additive as needed.
Thelaminates 1A to 1H can include any other elements than those described above, if necessary, and the configuration can be changed as appropriate.
For example, as in a laminate 1I shown in FIG. 17, even a laminate including the light-transmissive member 12, the light-transmissive resin film 50, the light-transmissive substrate 11, and the concavo-convex layer 20 in order from the viewer side Good.
In addition, as in thelaminate 1J shown in FIG. 18, a laminate including the light-transmissive member 12, the light-transmissive resin film 50, the light-transmissive substrate 11, the concavo-convex layer 20, and the reflective layer 30 in order from the viewer side It may be
凹凸層20、反射層30、加飾層40、41、透光性樹脂膜50は、必要に応じて、任意の添加剤を含むことができる。
積層体1A~1Hは、必要に応じて、上記以外の任意の要素を含むことができ、また、適宜構成を変更することが可能である。
例えば、図17に示す積層体1Iのように、観察者側から順に、透光性部材12、透光性樹脂膜50、透光性基材11、凹凸層20を備える積層体であってもよい。
また、図18に示す積層体1Jのように、観察者側から順に、透光性部材12、透光性樹脂膜50、透光性基材11、凹凸層20、反射層30を備える積層体であってもよい。 The
The concavo-
The
For example, as in a laminate 1I shown in FIG. 17, even a laminate including the light-
In addition, as in the
また、図19に示す積層体1Kのように、観察者側から順に、透光性部材12、透光性樹脂膜50、加飾層40、透光性基材11、凹凸層20、反射層30を備える積層体であってもよい。
また、図20に示す積層体1Lのように、観察者側から順に、透光性部材12、透光性樹脂膜50、反射層30、凹凸層20、透光性基材11、加飾層40を備える積層体であってもよい。
また、図21に示す積層体1Mのように、観察者側から順に、透光性部材12、透光性樹脂膜50、透光性基材11、凹凸層20、加飾層40を備える積層体であってもよい。 In addition, as in thelaminate 1K shown in FIG. 19, the light-transmissive member 12, the light-transmissive resin film 50, the decorative layer 40, the light-transmissive substrate 11, the uneven layer 20, and the reflective layer are sequentially from the viewer side. It may be a laminate comprising 30.
In addition, as in thelaminate 1L illustrated in FIG. 20, the light-transmissive member 12, the light-transmissive resin film 50, the reflective layer 30, the uneven layer 20, the light-transmissive substrate 11, and the decoration layer are sequentially from the observer side. 40 may be a laminated body.
In addition, as in a laminate 1M shown in FIG. 21, a laminate including the light-transmissive member 12, the light-transmissive resin film 50, the light-transmissive substrate 11, the concavo-convex layer 20, and the decorative layer 40 in order from the viewer side It may be the body.
また、図20に示す積層体1Lのように、観察者側から順に、透光性部材12、透光性樹脂膜50、反射層30、凹凸層20、透光性基材11、加飾層40を備える積層体であってもよい。
また、図21に示す積層体1Mのように、観察者側から順に、透光性部材12、透光性樹脂膜50、透光性基材11、凹凸層20、加飾層40を備える積層体であってもよい。 In addition, as in the
In addition, as in the
In addition, as in a laminate 1M shown in FIG. 21, a laminate including the light-
また、図22に示す積層体1Nのように、観察者側から順に、透光性部材12、透光性樹脂膜50、透光性基材11、凹凸層20、加飾層40、反射層30を備える積層体であってもよい。
積層体は、平面視において、加飾層40が凹凸層20の形成されていない領域に形成されてもよい。そのように加飾層40が形成されることにより、表面が着色されたガラスに彫刻を入れた、着色層のある切子ガラスのような外観が得られ、意匠性が高くなる。
また、着色層のある切子ガラスは表面全体が着色されたガラスに彫刻を入れることにより製造される場合が多いため、積層体は、平面視において、加飾層40が凹凸層20の形成されていない全ての領域に形成されてもよい。そのように加飾層40が形成されることにより、着色層のある切子ガラスに似た外観の積層体が得られる。 In addition, as in thelaminate 1N shown in FIG. 22, the light-transmissive member 12, the light-transmissive resin film 50, the light-transmissive substrate 11, the uneven layer 20, the decorative layer 40, and the reflective layer are sequentially from the viewer side. It may be a laminate comprising 30.
In the planar view, thedecorative layer 40 may be formed in a region where the concavo-convex layer 20 is not formed. By forming the decorative layer 40 in such a manner, an appearance like a facet glass with a colored layer obtained by engraving a glass whose surface is colored is obtained, and the designability is enhanced.
Moreover, since the facet glass with a colored layer is often produced by engraving on the glass whose entire surface is colored, in the laminate, thedecorative layer 40 is not formed with the uneven layer 20 in plan view It may be formed in all areas. By forming the decorative layer 40 in such a manner, a laminate having an appearance similar to a faceted glass having a colored layer can be obtained.
積層体は、平面視において、加飾層40が凹凸層20の形成されていない領域に形成されてもよい。そのように加飾層40が形成されることにより、表面が着色されたガラスに彫刻を入れた、着色層のある切子ガラスのような外観が得られ、意匠性が高くなる。
また、着色層のある切子ガラスは表面全体が着色されたガラスに彫刻を入れることにより製造される場合が多いため、積層体は、平面視において、加飾層40が凹凸層20の形成されていない全ての領域に形成されてもよい。そのように加飾層40が形成されることにより、着色層のある切子ガラスに似た外観の積層体が得られる。 In addition, as in the
In the planar view, the
Moreover, since the facet glass with a colored layer is often produced by engraving on the glass whose entire surface is colored, in the laminate, the
以下に、実施例に基づいて本発明について説明するが、本発明は、これらに限定されるものではない。なお、各例で用いた材料の略号および機器などは、以下の通りである。
<ガラス板>
(G1)フロートガラス板(縦10cm×横10cm×厚み1.8mm、屈折率1.52、AGC社製「FL2」)。 EXAMPLES The present invention will be described below based on examples, but the present invention is not limited to these. In addition, the symbol and apparatus of the material used in each case are as follows.
<Glass plate>
(G1) Float glass plate (10 cm in length × 10 cm in width × 1.8 mm in thickness, 1.52 in refractive index, “FL2” manufactured by AGC Corporation).
<ガラス板>
(G1)フロートガラス板(縦10cm×横10cm×厚み1.8mm、屈折率1.52、AGC社製「FL2」)。 EXAMPLES The present invention will be described below based on examples, but the present invention is not limited to these. In addition, the symbol and apparatus of the material used in each case are as follows.
<Glass plate>
(G1) Float glass plate (10 cm in length × 10 cm in width × 1.8 mm in thickness, 1.52 in refractive index, “FL2” manufactured by AGC Corporation).
<熱可塑性樹脂フィルム>
(F1)EVAフィルム(縦10cm×横10cm×厚み0.4mm、ブリジストン社製「AB膜」)、
(F2)ポリエチレンテレフタレート(PET)フィルム(縦10cm×横10cm×厚み125μm、プリンタペーパープロ社製)。
(F3)ポリカーボネートフィルム(縦10cm×横10cm×厚み50μm、エスカーボシート社製「C000」)。
<透明両面テープ>
(T1)透明両面テープ(縦10cm×横10cm×厚み50μm、日栄化工社製「G25」)。
<UVプリンター>
ミマキエンジニアリング社製、UJF-6042MkII。 <Thermoplastic resin film>
(F1) EVA film (10 cm long × 10 cm wide × 0.4 mm thick, “AB film” manufactured by Bridgestone Corporation),
(F2) Polyethylene terephthalate (PET) film (10 cm long × 10 cm wide × 125 μm thickness, manufactured by Printer Paper Pro, Inc.).
(F3) Polycarbonate film (10 cm in length × 10 cm in width × 50 μm in thickness, “C000” manufactured by ESCABO SHEET CO., LTD.).
<Transparent double-sided tape>
(T1) Transparent double-sided tape (10 cm in length × 10 cm in width × 50 μm in thickness, “G25” manufactured by Niei Kasei Co., Ltd.).
<UV printer>
MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO., LTD., UJF-6042 Mk II.
(F1)EVAフィルム(縦10cm×横10cm×厚み0.4mm、ブリジストン社製「AB膜」)、
(F2)ポリエチレンテレフタレート(PET)フィルム(縦10cm×横10cm×厚み125μm、プリンタペーパープロ社製)。
(F3)ポリカーボネートフィルム(縦10cm×横10cm×厚み50μm、エスカーボシート社製「C000」)。
<透明両面テープ>
(T1)透明両面テープ(縦10cm×横10cm×厚み50μm、日栄化工社製「G25」)。
<UVプリンター>
ミマキエンジニアリング社製、UJF-6042MkII。 <Thermoplastic resin film>
(F1) EVA film (10 cm long × 10 cm wide × 0.4 mm thick, “AB film” manufactured by Bridgestone Corporation),
(F2) Polyethylene terephthalate (PET) film (10 cm long × 10 cm wide × 125 μm thickness, manufactured by Printer Paper Pro, Inc.).
(F3) Polycarbonate film (10 cm in length × 10 cm in width × 50 μm in thickness, “C000” manufactured by ESCABO SHEET CO., LTD.).
<Transparent double-sided tape>
(T1) Transparent double-sided tape (10 cm in length × 10 cm in width × 50 μm in thickness, “G25” manufactured by Niei Kasei Co., Ltd.).
<UV printer>
MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO., LTD., UJF-6042 Mk II.
[例1-1~1-24]
例1-1~1-24の各例においては、UVプリンターを使用し、印刷条件を変えて、ガラス板(G1)のほぼ全面に屈折率が1.51のクリアーインク(ミマキエンジニアリング社製、LH-100-CL-BA)を用いて印刷を行い、図1Aに示したような積層構造を有する、透明凹凸印刷層(P1)((P1-1)~(P1-24)のうちいずれか)/ガラス板(G1)の積層体を得た。 [Example 1-1 to 1-24]
In each of Examples 1-1 to 1-24, using a UV printer and changing the printing conditions, a clear ink having a refractive index of 1.51 (manufactured by MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO., LTD.) Is applied to almost the entire surface of the glass plate (G1). Printing is carried out using LH-100-CL-BA, and any one of transparent concavo-convex printing layers (P1) ((P1-1) to (P1-24) having a laminated structure as shown in FIG. 1A ) / Laminated glass plate (G1) was obtained.
例1-1~1-24の各例においては、UVプリンターを使用し、印刷条件を変えて、ガラス板(G1)のほぼ全面に屈折率が1.51のクリアーインク(ミマキエンジニアリング社製、LH-100-CL-BA)を用いて印刷を行い、図1Aに示したような積層構造を有する、透明凹凸印刷層(P1)((P1-1)~(P1-24)のうちいずれか)/ガラス板(G1)の積層体を得た。 [Example 1-1 to 1-24]
In each of Examples 1-1 to 1-24, using a UV printer and changing the printing conditions, a clear ink having a refractive index of 1.51 (manufactured by MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO., LTD.) Is applied to almost the entire surface of the glass plate (G1). Printing is carried out using LH-100-CL-BA, and any one of transparent concavo-convex printing layers (P1) ((P1-1) to (P1-24) having a laminated structure as shown in FIG. 1A ) / Laminated glass plate (G1) was obtained.
これらの例において、印刷パターンは、平面視にて、複数の曲部を有するライン状の凸部が間隔を空けて複数形成されたパターンとした。具体的には、図9A~図9Cに示したような、平面視にて、曲部を介してなめらかに接続された第1の方向(図示斜め右上方向)に向かう第1の直線部と第2の方向(図示斜め右下方向)に向かう第2の直線部とからなるパターンを図示左右方向に連続的に繰り返し有するライン状の複数の凸部が、等ピッチで図示上下方向に周期的に形成されたパターンとした。
In these examples, the printing pattern is a pattern in which, in plan view, a plurality of linear convex portions having a plurality of curved portions are formed at intervals. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9A to 9C, in plan view, the first straight portion and the first straight portion directed in the first direction (the obliquely upper right direction in the figure) connected smoothly through the curved portion. A plurality of linear convex portions having a pattern consisting of a second linear portion directed in the two directions (in the obliquely lower right direction in the drawing) and repeated continuously in the horizontal direction in the drawing It was set as the formed pattern.
各例においては、表1に示すように、1本のライン状の凸部の曲げの回数、直線長さ(第1の直線部および第2の直線部の長さ(これらの長さは同一))(mm)、互いに隣り合う曲部の極点間の距離(D)(mm)、曲部の曲率半径(R)(mm)、曲部の曲率半径(R)に対する直線長さの比(直線長さ/R)、曲部の曲率半径(R)に対する互いに隣り合う曲部の極点間の距離(D)の比(D/R)、凸部の曲げ角度(曲部を介して接続された第1の直線部と第2の直線部とのなす角度)(°)、凸部の線幅(L)(μm)、複数の凸部(S)の間隔(μm)、凸部の線幅(L)に対する複数の凸部の間隔(S)の比(S/L)、および凸部の高さ(H)(μm)の印刷条件を設定した。
In each example, as shown in Table 1, the number of bending of one linear convex portion, the linear length (the lengths of the first linear portion and the second linear portion (these lengths are the same. )) (Mm), distance between pole points of adjacent curved parts (D) (mm), radius of curvature of curved parts (R) (mm), ratio of linear length to radius of curvature (R) of curved parts (R) Straight line length / R), ratio of distance (D) between pole points of adjacent curved parts to radius of curvature (R) of curved part (D / R), bending angle of convex part (connected via the curved part) Angle between the first linear portion and the second linear portion) (°), line width (L) of convex portion (μm), distance (μm) between plural convex portions (S), line of convex portions The printing conditions of the ratio (S / L) of the spacing (S) of the plurality of protrusions to the width (L) and the height (H) (μm) of the protrusions were set.
各例において得られた積層体を透明凹凸印刷層(P1)((P1-1)~(P1-24)のうちいずれか)側とガラス板(G1)側から目視して、下記基準にて立体視のレベルを評価した。
○(良):光源および/または観察者の位置に関係なく、透明凹凸印刷層(P1)に含まれる複数の凸部の曲部が連なる部分が手前側または奥側に膨らんでいるように立体的に視認され、ガラス厚以上の奥行が感じられ、意匠性が高かった。
△(可):光源および/または観察者の位置により、透明凹凸印刷層(P1)に含まれる複数の凸部の曲部が連なる部分が手前側または奥側に膨らんでいるように立体的に視認され、ガラス厚以上の奥行が感じられる場合があった。
×(不良):透明凹凸印刷層(P1)に含まれる複数の凸部の曲部が連なる部分が立体的に視認されなかった。
評価結果を表1に示す。 The laminate obtained in each example was visually observed from the side of the transparent concavo-convex printed layer (P1) (any one of (P1-1) to (P1-24)) and the glass plate (G1) side, and the following criteria were used. The level of stereoscopic vision was assessed.
○ (Good): Regardless of the position of the light source and / or the observer, the three-dimensional structure is such that the portion where the curved portions of the plurality of convex portions included in the transparent concavo-convex printing layer (P1) are connected bulges forward or backward It was visually recognized, the depth more than glass thickness was felt, and the designability was high.
Δ (OK): Depending on the position of the light source and / or the observer, the three-dimensional shape is such that the portion where the curved portions of the plurality of convex portions included in the transparent concavo-convex printing layer (P1) are connected bulges forward or backward It was visually recognized, and there was a case where depth more than glass thickness was felt.
X (defect): The part which the curved part of the several convex part contained in a transparent uneven | corrugated printing layer (P1) continues was not visually recognized in three dimensions.
The evaluation results are shown in Table 1.
○(良):光源および/または観察者の位置に関係なく、透明凹凸印刷層(P1)に含まれる複数の凸部の曲部が連なる部分が手前側または奥側に膨らんでいるように立体的に視認され、ガラス厚以上の奥行が感じられ、意匠性が高かった。
△(可):光源および/または観察者の位置により、透明凹凸印刷層(P1)に含まれる複数の凸部の曲部が連なる部分が手前側または奥側に膨らんでいるように立体的に視認され、ガラス厚以上の奥行が感じられる場合があった。
×(不良):透明凹凸印刷層(P1)に含まれる複数の凸部の曲部が連なる部分が立体的に視認されなかった。
評価結果を表1に示す。 The laminate obtained in each example was visually observed from the side of the transparent concavo-convex printed layer (P1) (any one of (P1-1) to (P1-24)) and the glass plate (G1) side, and the following criteria were used. The level of stereoscopic vision was assessed.
○ (Good): Regardless of the position of the light source and / or the observer, the three-dimensional structure is such that the portion where the curved portions of the plurality of convex portions included in the transparent concavo-convex printing layer (P1) are connected bulges forward or backward It was visually recognized, the depth more than glass thickness was felt, and the designability was high.
Δ (OK): Depending on the position of the light source and / or the observer, the three-dimensional shape is such that the portion where the curved portions of the plurality of convex portions included in the transparent concavo-convex printing layer (P1) are connected bulges forward or backward It was visually recognized, and there was a case where depth more than glass thickness was felt.
X (defect): The part which the curved part of the several convex part contained in a transparent uneven | corrugated printing layer (P1) continues was not visually recognized in three dimensions.
The evaluation results are shown in Table 1.
凹凸層は平面視にて、曲げ角度が30~150°である複数の曲部を有するライン状の凸部が間隔を空けて複数形成されたパターンを有し、凸部の線幅(L)に対する複数の凸部の間隔(S)の比(S/L)が10以下であるときに、透明凹凸印刷層(P1)側、ガラス板(G1)側のどちらから目視しても、透明凹凸印刷層(P1)に含まれる複数の凸部の曲部が連なる部分が手前側または奥側に膨らんでいるように立体的に視認され、ガラス厚以上の奥行が感じられ、意匠性が高かった。
また、曲部の曲率半径(R)に対する互いに隣り合う曲部の極点間の距離(D)の比(D/R)が150以下であるときに、立体視感が増し、ガラス厚以上の奥行が感じられ、より意匠性が高かった。
特に、凸部の線幅(L)に対する複数の凸部の間隔(S)の比(S/L)が3以下であり、曲部の曲率半径(R)に対する互いに隣り合う曲部の極点間の距離(D)の比(D/R)が0.1~50であり、曲部の曲げ角度が50~130°であるときに、立体視感が増し、ガラス厚以上の奥行が感じられ、より意匠性が高かった。 The concavo-convex layer has a pattern in which a plurality of line-shaped convex parts having a plurality of curved parts having a bending angle of 30 to 150 degrees are formed at intervals in plan view, and the line width (L) of the convex parts When the ratio (S / L) of the spacing (S) of the plurality of convex portions to that of 10 is 10 or less, the transparent asperity is visible from either the transparent asperity print layer (P1) side or the glass plate (G1) side The portion where the curved portions of the plurality of convex portions included in the printing layer (P1) are connected is three-dimensionally viewed as if it is bulging toward the front side or the back side, the depth more than the glass thickness is felt, and the designability is high .
Also, when the ratio (D / R) between the distance (D) between the extreme points of the adjacent curved portions to the radius of curvature (R) of the curved portion is 150 or less, the stereoscopic vision is enhanced, and the depth more than the glass thickness Was felt, and the design was higher.
In particular, the ratio (S / L) of the spacing (S) of the plurality of convex portions to the line width (L) of the convex portions is 3 or less, and the pole points of the adjacent curved portions to the radius of curvature (R) of the curved portion When the ratio (D / R) of the distance (D) is 0.1 to 50 and the bending angle of the curved portion is 50 to 130 °, the stereoscopic vision is increased and the depth greater than the glass thickness is felt. The design was higher.
また、曲部の曲率半径(R)に対する互いに隣り合う曲部の極点間の距離(D)の比(D/R)が150以下であるときに、立体視感が増し、ガラス厚以上の奥行が感じられ、より意匠性が高かった。
特に、凸部の線幅(L)に対する複数の凸部の間隔(S)の比(S/L)が3以下であり、曲部の曲率半径(R)に対する互いに隣り合う曲部の極点間の距離(D)の比(D/R)が0.1~50であり、曲部の曲げ角度が50~130°であるときに、立体視感が増し、ガラス厚以上の奥行が感じられ、より意匠性が高かった。 The concavo-convex layer has a pattern in which a plurality of line-shaped convex parts having a plurality of curved parts having a bending angle of 30 to 150 degrees are formed at intervals in plan view, and the line width (L) of the convex parts When the ratio (S / L) of the spacing (S) of the plurality of convex portions to that of 10 is 10 or less, the transparent asperity is visible from either the transparent asperity print layer (P1) side or the glass plate (G1) side The portion where the curved portions of the plurality of convex portions included in the printing layer (P1) are connected is three-dimensionally viewed as if it is bulging toward the front side or the back side, the depth more than the glass thickness is felt, and the designability is high .
Also, when the ratio (D / R) between the distance (D) between the extreme points of the adjacent curved portions to the radius of curvature (R) of the curved portion is 150 or less, the stereoscopic vision is enhanced, and the depth more than the glass thickness Was felt, and the design was higher.
In particular, the ratio (S / L) of the spacing (S) of the plurality of convex portions to the line width (L) of the convex portions is 3 or less, and the pole points of the adjacent curved portions to the radius of curvature (R) of the curved portion When the ratio (D / R) of the distance (D) is 0.1 to 50 and the bending angle of the curved portion is 50 to 130 °, the stereoscopic vision is increased and the depth greater than the glass thickness is felt. The design was higher.
[例2]
例1-8で得られた積層体の透明凹凸印刷層(P1-8)上に、スパッタ法により反射層としてAlを100nm厚成膜して、図2に示したような積層構造を有する、Al反射層(R1)/透明凹凸印刷層(P1-8)/ガラス板(G1)の積層体を得た。得られた積層体について、立体視のレベルを目視評価した。
得られた積層体は、Al反射層(R1)側、ガラス板(G1)側のどちらから目視しても、透明凹凸印刷層(P1)に含まれる複数の凸部の曲部が連なる部分が手前側または奥側に膨らんでいるように立体的に視認され、ガラス厚以上の奥行が感じられ、意匠性が高かった。得られた積層体は、例1-8で得られた積層体に対して、透明凹凸印刷に沿った反射が強くなり、透明凹凸印刷層(P1)上にその表面凹凸に沿って反射層として反射率の高い金属層を形成することで、立体視感を強調できることが分かった。 [Example 2]
On the transparent asperity printed layer (P1-8) of the laminate obtained in Example 1-8, Al is deposited to a thickness of 100 nm as a reflective layer by a sputtering method, and it has a laminate structure as shown in FIG. A laminate of Al reflective layer (R1) / transparent uneven printed layer (P1-8) / glass plate (G1) was obtained. The level of stereoscopic vision was visually evaluated for the obtained laminate.
The obtained laminated body has a portion where the curved portions of the plurality of convex portions included in the transparent asperity printed layer (P1) are continuous even when viewed from either the Al reflective layer (R1) side or the glass plate (G1) side It was visually recognized in a three-dimensional manner as if it swelled to the near side or the far side, and a depth greater than the glass thickness was felt, and the designability was high. With respect to the laminate obtained in Example 1-8, the obtained laminate has a strong reflection along the transparent relief printing, and as a reflective layer on the transparent relief print layer (P1) along the surface irregularities. It was found that by forming a metal layer with high reflectance, it is possible to emphasize stereoscopic vision.
例1-8で得られた積層体の透明凹凸印刷層(P1-8)上に、スパッタ法により反射層としてAlを100nm厚成膜して、図2に示したような積層構造を有する、Al反射層(R1)/透明凹凸印刷層(P1-8)/ガラス板(G1)の積層体を得た。得られた積層体について、立体視のレベルを目視評価した。
得られた積層体は、Al反射層(R1)側、ガラス板(G1)側のどちらから目視しても、透明凹凸印刷層(P1)に含まれる複数の凸部の曲部が連なる部分が手前側または奥側に膨らんでいるように立体的に視認され、ガラス厚以上の奥行が感じられ、意匠性が高かった。得られた積層体は、例1-8で得られた積層体に対して、透明凹凸印刷に沿った反射が強くなり、透明凹凸印刷層(P1)上にその表面凹凸に沿って反射層として反射率の高い金属層を形成することで、立体視感を強調できることが分かった。 [Example 2]
On the transparent asperity printed layer (P1-8) of the laminate obtained in Example 1-8, Al is deposited to a thickness of 100 nm as a reflective layer by a sputtering method, and it has a laminate structure as shown in FIG. A laminate of Al reflective layer (R1) / transparent uneven printed layer (P1-8) / glass plate (G1) was obtained. The level of stereoscopic vision was visually evaluated for the obtained laminate.
The obtained laminated body has a portion where the curved portions of the plurality of convex portions included in the transparent asperity printed layer (P1) are continuous even when viewed from either the Al reflective layer (R1) side or the glass plate (G1) side It was visually recognized in a three-dimensional manner as if it swelled to the near side or the far side, and a depth greater than the glass thickness was felt, and the designability was high. With respect to the laminate obtained in Example 1-8, the obtained laminate has a strong reflection along the transparent relief printing, and as a reflective layer on the transparent relief print layer (P1) along the surface irregularities. It was found that by forming a metal layer with high reflectance, it is possible to emphasize stereoscopic vision.
図9Aはカメラ「TOUGH TG-5」(オリンパス社製)を用い、また、図9Bおよび図9Cは光学顕微鏡「VHX-S15」(キーエンス社製)を用いて、倍率を変えて例2で得られた積層体を撮像して得られた表面写真である。図9Aでは図示上下方向に複数の第1の直線部が連なった部分は相対的に明るく、複数の第2の直線部が連なった部分は相対的に暗く、明暗のストライプが見られた。図示上下方向に複数の曲部が連なった部分は明暗のストライブの間にあり、手前側または奥側に膨らんでいるように立体的に視認され、ガラス厚以上の奥行が感じられた。
FIG. 9A uses a camera “TOUGH TG-5” (manufactured by Olympus Corporation), and FIGS. 9B and 9C are obtained in Example 2 while changing the magnification using an optical microscope “VHX-S15” (manufactured by Keyence Corporation). It is a surface photograph obtained by imaging the obtained laminate. In FIG. 9A, a portion where a plurality of first straight portions are continuous in the vertical direction in the drawing is relatively bright, and a portion where a plurality of second straight portions is continuous is relatively dark and bright and dark stripes are observed. The portion where a plurality of curved portions were connected in the vertical direction in the drawing is between streaks of light and dark, and it is three-dimensionally viewed as if it bulges to the front side or the back side, and a depth greater than the glass thickness is felt.
[例3]
例1-8で得られた積層体の透明凹凸印刷層(P1-8)上に、スパッタ法により反射層としてZnO(屈折率:2.0)を60nm厚成膜して、図2に示したような積層構造を有する、ZnO反射層(R2)/透明凹凸印刷層(P1)/ガラス板(G1)の積層体を得た。得られた積層体について、立体視のレベルを目視評価した。
得られた積層体は、ZnO反射層(R2)側、ガラス板(G1)側のどちらから目視しても、透明凹凸印刷層(P1)に含まれる複数の凸部の曲部が連なる部分が手前側または奥側に膨らんでいるように立体的に視認され、ガラス厚以上の奥行が感じられ、意匠性が高かった。得られた積層体は、例1-1で得られた積層体に対して、透明凹凸印刷に沿った反射が強くなり、透明凹凸印刷層(P1)上にその表面凹凸に沿って反射層として透明凹凸印刷層との屈折率差の大きい金属酸化物層を形成することで、立体視感を強調できることが分かった。 [Example 3]
A 60 nm thick ZnO (refractive index: 2.0) film was formed as a reflective layer by sputtering on the transparent asperity printed layer (P1-8) of the laminate obtained in Example 1-8, as shown in FIG. A laminate of a ZnO reflective layer (R2) / a transparent concavo-convex printed layer (P1) / a glass plate (G1) having a laminated structure was obtained. The level of stereoscopic vision was visually evaluated for the obtained laminate.
The obtained laminated body has a portion where the curved portions of the plurality of convex portions included in the transparent asperity printed layer (P1) are continuous even when viewed from either the ZnO reflective layer (R2) side or the glass plate (G1) side It was visually recognized in a three-dimensional manner as if it swelled to the near side or the far side, and a depth greater than the glass thickness was felt, and the designability was high. With respect to the laminate obtained in Example 1-1, the obtained laminate has a strong reflection along the transparent relief printing, and as a reflective layer on the transparent relief print layer (P1) along the surface irregularities. It was found that by forming a metal oxide layer having a large difference in refractive index with the transparent asperity printed layer, it is possible to emphasize stereoscopic vision.
例1-8で得られた積層体の透明凹凸印刷層(P1-8)上に、スパッタ法により反射層としてZnO(屈折率:2.0)を60nm厚成膜して、図2に示したような積層構造を有する、ZnO反射層(R2)/透明凹凸印刷層(P1)/ガラス板(G1)の積層体を得た。得られた積層体について、立体視のレベルを目視評価した。
得られた積層体は、ZnO反射層(R2)側、ガラス板(G1)側のどちらから目視しても、透明凹凸印刷層(P1)に含まれる複数の凸部の曲部が連なる部分が手前側または奥側に膨らんでいるように立体的に視認され、ガラス厚以上の奥行が感じられ、意匠性が高かった。得られた積層体は、例1-1で得られた積層体に対して、透明凹凸印刷に沿った反射が強くなり、透明凹凸印刷層(P1)上にその表面凹凸に沿って反射層として透明凹凸印刷層との屈折率差の大きい金属酸化物層を形成することで、立体視感を強調できることが分かった。 [Example 3]
A 60 nm thick ZnO (refractive index: 2.0) film was formed as a reflective layer by sputtering on the transparent asperity printed layer (P1-8) of the laminate obtained in Example 1-8, as shown in FIG. A laminate of a ZnO reflective layer (R2) / a transparent concavo-convex printed layer (P1) / a glass plate (G1) having a laminated structure was obtained. The level of stereoscopic vision was visually evaluated for the obtained laminate.
The obtained laminated body has a portion where the curved portions of the plurality of convex portions included in the transparent asperity printed layer (P1) are continuous even when viewed from either the ZnO reflective layer (R2) side or the glass plate (G1) side It was visually recognized in a three-dimensional manner as if it swelled to the near side or the far side, and a depth greater than the glass thickness was felt, and the designability was high. With respect to the laminate obtained in Example 1-1, the obtained laminate has a strong reflection along the transparent relief printing, and as a reflective layer on the transparent relief print layer (P1) along the surface irregularities. It was found that by forming a metal oxide layer having a large difference in refractive index with the transparent asperity printed layer, it is possible to emphasize stereoscopic vision.
[例4]
ガラス板(G1)上にUVプリンターを使用し、木目柄の着色印刷加飾層(P2)を形成した。その上に例1-1と同様にして透明凹凸印刷層(P1-8)を形成し、透明凹凸印刷層(P1-8)/木目柄の着色印刷加飾層(P2)/ガラス板(G1)の積層体を得た。得られた積層体について、立体視のレベルを目視評価した。
得られた積層体をガラス板(G1)側から目視したとき、木目柄の着色印刷は、透明凹凸印刷層(P1)に含まれる複数の凸部の曲部が連なる部分が手前側または奥側に膨らんでいるように立体的に視認され、ガラス厚以上の奥行が感じられ、意匠性が高かった。 [Example 4]
A UV printer was used on a glass plate (G1) to form a colored printed decorative layer (P2) of wood grain pattern. A transparent asperity printed layer (P1-8) is formed thereon in the same manner as in Example 1-1, and the transparent asperity printed layer (P1-8) / wood grain colored printed decorative layer (P2) / glass plate (G1) ) Was obtained. The level of stereoscopic vision was visually evaluated for the obtained laminate.
When the obtained laminate is viewed from the glass plate (G1) side, in the colored printing of wood grain patterns, the portion where the curved portions of the plurality of convex portions included in the transparent uneven print layer (P1) are connected is the front side or the back side It looked three-dimensionally as if it were swollen, and felt depth more than glass thickness, and the designability was high.
ガラス板(G1)上にUVプリンターを使用し、木目柄の着色印刷加飾層(P2)を形成した。その上に例1-1と同様にして透明凹凸印刷層(P1-8)を形成し、透明凹凸印刷層(P1-8)/木目柄の着色印刷加飾層(P2)/ガラス板(G1)の積層体を得た。得られた積層体について、立体視のレベルを目視評価した。
得られた積層体をガラス板(G1)側から目視したとき、木目柄の着色印刷は、透明凹凸印刷層(P1)に含まれる複数の凸部の曲部が連なる部分が手前側または奥側に膨らんでいるように立体的に視認され、ガラス厚以上の奥行が感じられ、意匠性が高かった。 [Example 4]
A UV printer was used on a glass plate (G1) to form a colored printed decorative layer (P2) of wood grain pattern. A transparent asperity printed layer (P1-8) is formed thereon in the same manner as in Example 1-1, and the transparent asperity printed layer (P1-8) / wood grain colored printed decorative layer (P2) / glass plate (G1) ) Was obtained. The level of stereoscopic vision was visually evaluated for the obtained laminate.
When the obtained laminate is viewed from the glass plate (G1) side, in the colored printing of wood grain patterns, the portion where the curved portions of the plurality of convex portions included in the transparent uneven print layer (P1) are connected is the front side or the back side It looked three-dimensionally as if it were swollen, and felt depth more than glass thickness, and the designability was high.
[例5]
例4で得られた積層体の透明凹凸印刷層(P1-8)上に、スパッタ法により反射層としてAlを100nm厚成膜して、図3に示したような積層構造を有する、Al反射層(R1)/透明凹凸印刷層(P1)/木目柄の着色印刷加飾層(P2)/ガラス板(G1)の積層体を得た。得られた積層体について、立体視のレベルを目視評価した。
得られた積層体をガラス板(G1)側から目視したとき、木目柄の着色印刷は、透明凹凸印刷層(P1-8)に含まれる複数の凸部の曲部が連なる部分が手前側または奥側に膨らんでいるように立体的に視認され、ガラス厚以上の奥行が感じられ、意匠性が高かった。得られた積層体は、例4で得られた積層体に対して、透明凹凸印刷に沿った反射が強くなり、木目柄のコントラストの向上が見られ、透明凹凸印刷層(P1-8)上にその表面凹凸に沿って反射層として反射率の高い金属層を形成することで、立体視感を強調できることが分かった。 [Example 5]
A 100 nm thick film of Al is formed as a reflective layer on the transparent concavo-convex printed layer (P1-8) of the laminate obtained in Example 4 by a sputtering method to have a laminate structure as shown in FIG. 3, Al reflection A layered product of a layer (R1) / transparent concavo-convex printing layer (P1) / colored printed decorative layer of wood grain pattern (P2) / glass plate (G1) was obtained. The level of stereoscopic vision was visually evaluated for the obtained laminate.
When the obtained laminate is viewed from the glass plate (G1) side, in the colored printing of wood grain patterns, the portion where the curved portions of the plurality of convex portions included in the transparent concavo-convex printing layer (P1-8) are on the front side or It looked three-dimensionally as if it swelled to the back side, the depth more than glass thickness was felt, and the designability was high. With respect to the laminate obtained in Example 4, the reflection along the transparent relief printing becomes stronger than that of the laminate obtained in Example 4, and the contrast of the wood grain pattern is improved, and on the transparent relief printing layer (P1-8) It has been found that by forming a metal layer having a high reflectance as a reflective layer along the surface irregularities, it is possible to enhance the stereoscopic vision.
例4で得られた積層体の透明凹凸印刷層(P1-8)上に、スパッタ法により反射層としてAlを100nm厚成膜して、図3に示したような積層構造を有する、Al反射層(R1)/透明凹凸印刷層(P1)/木目柄の着色印刷加飾層(P2)/ガラス板(G1)の積層体を得た。得られた積層体について、立体視のレベルを目視評価した。
得られた積層体をガラス板(G1)側から目視したとき、木目柄の着色印刷は、透明凹凸印刷層(P1-8)に含まれる複数の凸部の曲部が連なる部分が手前側または奥側に膨らんでいるように立体的に視認され、ガラス厚以上の奥行が感じられ、意匠性が高かった。得られた積層体は、例4で得られた積層体に対して、透明凹凸印刷に沿った反射が強くなり、木目柄のコントラストの向上が見られ、透明凹凸印刷層(P1-8)上にその表面凹凸に沿って反射層として反射率の高い金属層を形成することで、立体視感を強調できることが分かった。 [Example 5]
A 100 nm thick film of Al is formed as a reflective layer on the transparent concavo-convex printed layer (P1-8) of the laminate obtained in Example 4 by a sputtering method to have a laminate structure as shown in FIG. 3, Al reflection A layered product of a layer (R1) / transparent concavo-convex printing layer (P1) / colored printed decorative layer of wood grain pattern (P2) / glass plate (G1) was obtained. The level of stereoscopic vision was visually evaluated for the obtained laminate.
When the obtained laminate is viewed from the glass plate (G1) side, in the colored printing of wood grain patterns, the portion where the curved portions of the plurality of convex portions included in the transparent concavo-convex printing layer (P1-8) are on the front side or It looked three-dimensionally as if it swelled to the back side, the depth more than glass thickness was felt, and the designability was high. With respect to the laminate obtained in Example 4, the reflection along the transparent relief printing becomes stronger than that of the laminate obtained in Example 4, and the contrast of the wood grain pattern is improved, and on the transparent relief printing layer (P1-8) It has been found that by forming a metal layer having a high reflectance as a reflective layer along the surface irregularities, it is possible to enhance the stereoscopic vision.
[例6]
例1-8で得られた積層体の透明凹凸印刷層(P1-8)上に、UVプリンターを使用し、木目柄の着色印刷加飾層(P2)を形成して、木目柄の着色印刷加飾層(P2)/透明凹凸印刷層(P1)/ガラス板(G1)の積層体を得た。得られた積層体について、立体視のレベルを目視評価した。
得られた積層体は、ガラス板(G1)側から目視したとき、例1-1で得られた積層体と比較して相対的に立体視感の低下が見られた。これは、本来視認させたい透明凹凸印刷層の表面での反射によって得られる立体的な反射像が、木目柄の着色印刷加飾層(P2)の不規則な凹凸表面の反射によって乱されるためと考えられる。着色印刷加飾層を設ける場合には、図4に示したように、透明凹凸印刷層に沿って反射層を形成し、その上に、着色印刷加飾層を形成することが好ましいことが分かった。 [Example 6]
A colored printed decorative layer (P2) of wood grain pattern is formed on the transparent asperity printed layer (P1-8) of the laminate obtained in Example 1-8 using a UV printer, and the colored printing of wood grain pattern is printed The laminated body of a decoration layer (P2) / transparent uneven | corrugated printing layer (P1) / glass plate (G1) was obtained. The level of stereoscopic vision was visually evaluated for the obtained laminate.
When the obtained laminate was viewed from the side of the glass plate (G1), a relative decrease in stereoscopic vision was observed as compared with the laminate obtained in Example 1-1. This is because the three-dimensional reflection image obtained by the reflection on the surface of the transparent asperity print layer which is originally intended to be visually recognized is disturbed by the reflection of the irregular asperity surface of the colored printed decorative layer (P2) of the wood grain pattern it is conceivable that. In the case of providing a colored printing decoration layer, as shown in FIG. 4, it is understood that it is preferable to form a reflective layer along the transparent concavo-convex printing layer and to form a colored printing decoration layer thereon. The
例1-8で得られた積層体の透明凹凸印刷層(P1-8)上に、UVプリンターを使用し、木目柄の着色印刷加飾層(P2)を形成して、木目柄の着色印刷加飾層(P2)/透明凹凸印刷層(P1)/ガラス板(G1)の積層体を得た。得られた積層体について、立体視のレベルを目視評価した。
得られた積層体は、ガラス板(G1)側から目視したとき、例1-1で得られた積層体と比較して相対的に立体視感の低下が見られた。これは、本来視認させたい透明凹凸印刷層の表面での反射によって得られる立体的な反射像が、木目柄の着色印刷加飾層(P2)の不規則な凹凸表面の反射によって乱されるためと考えられる。着色印刷加飾層を設ける場合には、図4に示したように、透明凹凸印刷層に沿って反射層を形成し、その上に、着色印刷加飾層を形成することが好ましいことが分かった。 [Example 6]
A colored printed decorative layer (P2) of wood grain pattern is formed on the transparent asperity printed layer (P1-8) of the laminate obtained in Example 1-8 using a UV printer, and the colored printing of wood grain pattern is printed The laminated body of a decoration layer (P2) / transparent uneven | corrugated printing layer (P1) / glass plate (G1) was obtained. The level of stereoscopic vision was visually evaluated for the obtained laminate.
When the obtained laminate was viewed from the side of the glass plate (G1), a relative decrease in stereoscopic vision was observed as compared with the laminate obtained in Example 1-1. This is because the three-dimensional reflection image obtained by the reflection on the surface of the transparent asperity print layer which is originally intended to be visually recognized is disturbed by the reflection of the irregular asperity surface of the colored printed decorative layer (P2) of the wood grain pattern it is conceivable that. In the case of providing a colored printing decoration layer, as shown in FIG. 4, it is understood that it is preferable to form a reflective layer along the transparent concavo-convex printing layer and to form a colored printing decoration layer thereon. The
[例7]
例2で得られた積層体の反射層(R1)上に、UVプリンターを使用して木目柄の着色印刷加飾層(P2)を形成して予備積層体を得た。この予備積層体の木目柄の着色印刷加飾層(P2)上に、EVAフィルム(F1)とガラス板(G1)とを順次重ねて仮積層体を得た。この仮積層体をフィルムの袋の中に入れ、真空中で袋の口を加熱により封止して真空パックを作り、それを100℃で2時間加熱圧着した。加熱圧着後の積層体を袋から取り出し、図6に示したような積層構造を有する、ガラス板(G1)/EVAフィルム(F1)/木目柄の着色印刷加飾層(P2)/Al反射層(R1)/透明凹凸印刷層(P1-8)/ガラス板(G1)の積層体を得た。得られた積層体について、立体視のレベルを目視評価した。
得られた積層体をEVAフィルム(F1)上に重ねたガラス板(G1)側から目視したとき、木目柄の着色印刷は、透明凹凸印刷層(P1)に含まれる複数の凸部の曲部が連なる部分が手前側または奥側に膨らんでいるように立体的に視認され、ガラス厚以上の奥行が感じられ、意匠性が高かった。 [Example 7]
On the reflective layer (R1) of the laminate obtained in Example 2, a colored printed decorative layer (P2) of wood grain pattern was formed using a UV printer to obtain a preliminary laminate. An EVA film (F1) and a glass plate (G1) were sequentially stacked on the colored print decoration layer (P2) of the grain pattern of this preliminary laminate, to obtain a temporary laminate. The temporary laminate was placed in a film bag, and the mouth of the bag was sealed by heating under vacuum to form a vacuum pack, which was heat-pressed at 100 ° C. for 2 hours. The laminate after thermocompression bonding is taken out of the bag, and a glass plate (G1) / EVA film (F1) / wood grain pattern colored printed decorative layer (P2) / Al reflective layer having a laminated structure as shown in FIG. 6 A laminate of (R1) / transparent uneven printed layer (P1-8) / glass plate (G1) was obtained. The level of stereoscopic vision was visually evaluated for the obtained laminate.
When the obtained laminate is viewed from the side of the glass plate (G1) stacked on the EVA film (F1), the colored print of wood grain pattern is a curved portion of a plurality of convex portions included in the transparent uneven print layer (P1) The three-dimensional view was made as if the part where was bulging toward the front side or the back side, the depth more than the glass thickness was felt, and the designability was high.
例2で得られた積層体の反射層(R1)上に、UVプリンターを使用して木目柄の着色印刷加飾層(P2)を形成して予備積層体を得た。この予備積層体の木目柄の着色印刷加飾層(P2)上に、EVAフィルム(F1)とガラス板(G1)とを順次重ねて仮積層体を得た。この仮積層体をフィルムの袋の中に入れ、真空中で袋の口を加熱により封止して真空パックを作り、それを100℃で2時間加熱圧着した。加熱圧着後の積層体を袋から取り出し、図6に示したような積層構造を有する、ガラス板(G1)/EVAフィルム(F1)/木目柄の着色印刷加飾層(P2)/Al反射層(R1)/透明凹凸印刷層(P1-8)/ガラス板(G1)の積層体を得た。得られた積層体について、立体視のレベルを目視評価した。
得られた積層体をEVAフィルム(F1)上に重ねたガラス板(G1)側から目視したとき、木目柄の着色印刷は、透明凹凸印刷層(P1)に含まれる複数の凸部の曲部が連なる部分が手前側または奥側に膨らんでいるように立体的に視認され、ガラス厚以上の奥行が感じられ、意匠性が高かった。 [Example 7]
On the reflective layer (R1) of the laminate obtained in Example 2, a colored printed decorative layer (P2) of wood grain pattern was formed using a UV printer to obtain a preliminary laminate. An EVA film (F1) and a glass plate (G1) were sequentially stacked on the colored print decoration layer (P2) of the grain pattern of this preliminary laminate, to obtain a temporary laminate. The temporary laminate was placed in a film bag, and the mouth of the bag was sealed by heating under vacuum to form a vacuum pack, which was heat-pressed at 100 ° C. for 2 hours. The laminate after thermocompression bonding is taken out of the bag, and a glass plate (G1) / EVA film (F1) / wood grain pattern colored printed decorative layer (P2) / Al reflective layer having a laminated structure as shown in FIG. 6 A laminate of (R1) / transparent uneven printed layer (P1-8) / glass plate (G1) was obtained. The level of stereoscopic vision was visually evaluated for the obtained laminate.
When the obtained laminate is viewed from the side of the glass plate (G1) stacked on the EVA film (F1), the colored print of wood grain pattern is a curved portion of a plurality of convex portions included in the transparent uneven print layer (P1) The three-dimensional view was made as if the part where was bulging toward the front side or the back side, the depth more than the glass thickness was felt, and the designability was high.
[例8]
Al反射層(R1)を例3で形成したZnO反射層(R2)に変更した以外は例7と同様にして、図5に示したような積層構造を有する、ガラス板(G1)/EVAフィルム(F1)/木目柄の着色印刷加飾層(P2)/ZnO反射層(R2)/透明凹凸印刷層(P1-8)/ガラス板(G1)の積層体を得た。得られた積層体について、立体視のレベルを目視評価した。
得られた積層体をEVAフィルム(F1)上に重ねたガラス板(G1)側から目視したとき、木目柄の着色印刷は、透明凹凸印刷層(P1)に含まれる複数の凸部の曲部が連なる部分が手前側または奥側に膨らんでいるように立体的に視認され、ガラス厚以上の奥行が感じられ、意匠性が高かった。 [Example 8]
A glass plate (G1) / EVA film having a laminated structure as shown in FIG. 5 in the same manner as in Example 7 except that the Al reflection layer (R1) is changed to the ZnO reflection layer (R2) formed in Example 3. A laminate of (F1) / colored and printed decorative layer with wood grain pattern (P2) / ZnO reflective layer (R2) / transparent uneven printed layer (P1-8) / glass plate (G1) was obtained. The level of stereoscopic vision was visually evaluated for the obtained laminate.
When the obtained laminate is viewed from the side of the glass plate (G1) stacked on the EVA film (F1), the colored print of wood grain pattern is a curved portion of a plurality of convex portions included in the transparent uneven print layer (P1) The three-dimensional view was made as if the part where was bulging toward the front side or the back side, the depth more than the glass thickness was felt, and the designability was high.
Al反射層(R1)を例3で形成したZnO反射層(R2)に変更した以外は例7と同様にして、図5に示したような積層構造を有する、ガラス板(G1)/EVAフィルム(F1)/木目柄の着色印刷加飾層(P2)/ZnO反射層(R2)/透明凹凸印刷層(P1-8)/ガラス板(G1)の積層体を得た。得られた積層体について、立体視のレベルを目視評価した。
得られた積層体をEVAフィルム(F1)上に重ねたガラス板(G1)側から目視したとき、木目柄の着色印刷は、透明凹凸印刷層(P1)に含まれる複数の凸部の曲部が連なる部分が手前側または奥側に膨らんでいるように立体的に視認され、ガラス厚以上の奥行が感じられ、意匠性が高かった。 [Example 8]
A glass plate (G1) / EVA film having a laminated structure as shown in FIG. 5 in the same manner as in Example 7 except that the Al reflection layer (R1) is changed to the ZnO reflection layer (R2) formed in Example 3. A laminate of (F1) / colored and printed decorative layer with wood grain pattern (P2) / ZnO reflective layer (R2) / transparent uneven printed layer (P1-8) / glass plate (G1) was obtained. The level of stereoscopic vision was visually evaluated for the obtained laminate.
When the obtained laminate is viewed from the side of the glass plate (G1) stacked on the EVA film (F1), the colored print of wood grain pattern is a curved portion of a plurality of convex portions included in the transparent uneven print layer (P1) The three-dimensional view was made as if the part where was bulging toward the front side or the back side, the depth more than the glass thickness was felt, and the designability was high.
[例9]
表面に透明凹凸印刷層(P1)を形成する透光性基材としてガラス板(G1)の代わりにPETフィルム(F2)を用いた以外は例8と同様にして、図5に示したような積層構造を有する、ガラス板(G1)/EVAフィルム(F1)/木目柄の着色印刷加飾層(P2)/ZnO反射層(R2)/透明凹凸印刷層(P1-8)/PETフィルム(F2)の積層体を得た。
得られた積層体をガラス板(G1)側から目視したとき、木目柄の着色印刷は、透明凹凸印刷層(P1)に含まれる複数の凸部の曲部が連なる部分が手前側または奥側に膨らんでいるように立体的に視認され、ガラス厚以上の奥行が感じられ、意匠性が高かった。 [Example 9]
As shown in FIG. 5 in the same manner as in Example 8 except that a PET film (F2) was used instead of the glass plate (G1) as the light-transmissive substrate forming the transparent asperity printed layer (P1) on the surface. Glass plate (G1) / EVA film (F1) / wooden pattern colored printed decorative layer (P2) / ZnO reflective layer (R2) / transparent uneven printed layer (P1-8) / PET film (F2) having a laminated structure ) Was obtained.
When the obtained laminate is viewed from the glass plate (G1) side, in the colored printing of wood grain patterns, the portion where the curved portions of the plurality of convex portions included in the transparent uneven print layer (P1) are connected is the front side or the back side It looked three-dimensionally as if it were swollen, and felt depth more than glass thickness, and the designability was high.
表面に透明凹凸印刷層(P1)を形成する透光性基材としてガラス板(G1)の代わりにPETフィルム(F2)を用いた以外は例8と同様にして、図5に示したような積層構造を有する、ガラス板(G1)/EVAフィルム(F1)/木目柄の着色印刷加飾層(P2)/ZnO反射層(R2)/透明凹凸印刷層(P1-8)/PETフィルム(F2)の積層体を得た。
得られた積層体をガラス板(G1)側から目視したとき、木目柄の着色印刷は、透明凹凸印刷層(P1)に含まれる複数の凸部の曲部が連なる部分が手前側または奥側に膨らんでいるように立体的に視認され、ガラス厚以上の奥行が感じられ、意匠性が高かった。 [Example 9]
As shown in FIG. 5 in the same manner as in Example 8 except that a PET film (F2) was used instead of the glass plate (G1) as the light-transmissive substrate forming the transparent asperity printed layer (P1) on the surface. Glass plate (G1) / EVA film (F1) / wooden pattern colored printed decorative layer (P2) / ZnO reflective layer (R2) / transparent uneven printed layer (P1-8) / PET film (F2) having a laminated structure ) Was obtained.
When the obtained laminate is viewed from the glass plate (G1) side, in the colored printing of wood grain patterns, the portion where the curved portions of the plurality of convex portions included in the transparent uneven print layer (P1) are connected is the front side or the back side It looked three-dimensionally as if it were swollen, and felt depth more than glass thickness, and the designability was high.
[例10]
例1-8で得られた積層体の透明凹凸印刷層(P1-8)上に、スパッタ法により反射層としてZnO(屈折率:2.0)を60nm厚成膜し、UVプリンターを使用して木目柄の着色印刷加飾層(P2)を形成して、木目柄の着色印刷加飾層(P2)/ZnO反射層(R2)/透明凹凸印刷層(P1)/ガラス板(G1)の積層体を得た。得られた積層体について、立体視のレベルを目視評価した。
得られた積層体をガラス板(G1)側から目視したとき、木目柄の着色印刷の手前で透明凹凸印刷層(P1)に含まれる複数の凸部の曲部が連なる部分が手前側または奥側に膨らんでいるように立体的に視認され、ガラス厚以上の奥行が感じられ意匠性が高かった。 [Example 10]
A 60 nm thick ZnO (refractive index: 2.0) film was formed as a reflective layer on the transparent asperity printed layer (P1-8) of the laminate obtained in Example 1-8 by sputtering, and a UV printer was used. The colored printed decorative layer (P2) of the wood grain pattern is formed, and the colored printed decorative layer (P2) of the grain pattern / ZnO reflective layer (R2) / transparent uneven printed layer (P1) / glass plate (G1) A laminate was obtained. The level of stereoscopic vision was visually evaluated for the obtained laminate.
When the obtained laminate is viewed from the glass plate (G1) side, the portion where the curved portions of the plurality of convex portions included in the transparent concavo-convex printing layer (P1) are connected in front of or behind the colored printing of wood grain pattern It looked in three dimensions as if it swelled to the side, and the depth more than glass thickness was felt, and the designability was high.
例1-8で得られた積層体の透明凹凸印刷層(P1-8)上に、スパッタ法により反射層としてZnO(屈折率:2.0)を60nm厚成膜し、UVプリンターを使用して木目柄の着色印刷加飾層(P2)を形成して、木目柄の着色印刷加飾層(P2)/ZnO反射層(R2)/透明凹凸印刷層(P1)/ガラス板(G1)の積層体を得た。得られた積層体について、立体視のレベルを目視評価した。
得られた積層体をガラス板(G1)側から目視したとき、木目柄の着色印刷の手前で透明凹凸印刷層(P1)に含まれる複数の凸部の曲部が連なる部分が手前側または奥側に膨らんでいるように立体的に視認され、ガラス厚以上の奥行が感じられ意匠性が高かった。 [Example 10]
A 60 nm thick ZnO (refractive index: 2.0) film was formed as a reflective layer on the transparent asperity printed layer (P1-8) of the laminate obtained in Example 1-8 by sputtering, and a UV printer was used. The colored printed decorative layer (P2) of the wood grain pattern is formed, and the colored printed decorative layer (P2) of the grain pattern / ZnO reflective layer (R2) / transparent uneven printed layer (P1) / glass plate (G1) A laminate was obtained. The level of stereoscopic vision was visually evaluated for the obtained laminate.
When the obtained laminate is viewed from the glass plate (G1) side, the portion where the curved portions of the plurality of convex portions included in the transparent concavo-convex printing layer (P1) are connected in front of or behind the colored printing of wood grain pattern It looked in three dimensions as if it swelled to the side, and the depth more than glass thickness was felt, and the designability was high.
[例11]
例3で得られた積層体の反射層(R2)上に、UVプリンターを使用して木目柄の着色印刷加飾層(P2)を形成して、木目柄の着色印刷加飾層(P2)/ZnO反射層(R2)/透明凹凸印刷層(P1-8))/木目柄の着色印刷加飾層(P2)/ガラス板(G1)の積層体を得た。得られた積層体について、立体視のレベルを目視評価した。
得られた積層体をガラス板(G1)側から目視したとき、木目柄の着色印刷は、透明凹凸印刷層(P1-8)に含まれる複数の凸部の曲部が連なる部分が手前側または奥側に膨らんでいるように立体的に視認され、ガラス厚以上の奥行が感じられ、意匠性が高かった。 [Example 11]
A colored printed decorative layer (P2) of wood grain pattern is formed on a reflective layer (R2) of the laminate obtained in Example 3 using a UV printer, and a colored printed decoration layer of wood grain pattern (P2) A laminate of a / ZnO reflective layer (R2) / a transparent uneven printed layer (P1-8) / a colored printed decorative layer with a grain pattern (P2) / a glass plate (G1) was obtained. The level of stereoscopic vision was visually evaluated for the obtained laminate.
When the obtained laminate is viewed from the glass plate (G1) side, in the colored printing of wood grain patterns, the portion where the curved portions of the plurality of convex portions included in the transparent concavo-convex printing layer (P1-8) are on the front side or It looked three-dimensionally as if it swelled to the back side, the depth more than glass thickness was felt, and the designability was high.
例3で得られた積層体の反射層(R2)上に、UVプリンターを使用して木目柄の着色印刷加飾層(P2)を形成して、木目柄の着色印刷加飾層(P2)/ZnO反射層(R2)/透明凹凸印刷層(P1-8))/木目柄の着色印刷加飾層(P2)/ガラス板(G1)の積層体を得た。得られた積層体について、立体視のレベルを目視評価した。
得られた積層体をガラス板(G1)側から目視したとき、木目柄の着色印刷は、透明凹凸印刷層(P1-8)に含まれる複数の凸部の曲部が連なる部分が手前側または奥側に膨らんでいるように立体的に視認され、ガラス厚以上の奥行が感じられ、意匠性が高かった。 [Example 11]
A colored printed decorative layer (P2) of wood grain pattern is formed on a reflective layer (R2) of the laminate obtained in Example 3 using a UV printer, and a colored printed decoration layer of wood grain pattern (P2) A laminate of a / ZnO reflective layer (R2) / a transparent uneven printed layer (P1-8) / a colored printed decorative layer with a grain pattern (P2) / a glass plate (G1) was obtained. The level of stereoscopic vision was visually evaluated for the obtained laminate.
When the obtained laminate is viewed from the glass plate (G1) side, in the colored printing of wood grain patterns, the portion where the curved portions of the plurality of convex portions included in the transparent concavo-convex printing layer (P1-8) are on the front side or It looked three-dimensionally as if it swelled to the back side, the depth more than glass thickness was felt, and the designability was high.
[例12]
例4で得られた積層体の透明凹凸印刷層(P1-8)上に、スパッタ法により反射層としてZnO(屈折率:2.0)を60nm厚成膜して、予備積層体を得た。この予備積層体の木目柄の着色印刷加飾層(P2)上に、EVAフィルム(F1)とガラス板(G1)とを順次重ねて仮積層体を得た。この仮積層体をフィルムの袋の中に入れ、真空中で袋の口を加熱により封止して真空パックを作り、それを100℃で2時間加熱圧着した。加熱圧着後の積層体を袋から取り出し、図7に示したような積層構造を有する、ガラス板(G1)/EVAフィルム(F1)/ZnO反射層(R2)/透明凹凸印刷層(P1-8)/木目柄の着色印刷加飾層(P2)/ガラス板(G1)の積層体を得た。得られた積層体について、立体視のレベルを目視評価した。
得られた積層体をEVAフィルム(F1)上に重ねたガラス板(G1)側から目視したとき、木目柄の着色印刷の手前で透明凹凸印刷層(P1)に含まれる複数の凸部の曲部が連なる部分が手前側または奥側に膨らんでいるように立体的に視認され、ガラス厚以上の奥行が感じられ、意匠性が高かった。 [Example 12]
On the transparent asperity printed layer (P1-8) of the laminate obtained in Example 4, 60 nm of ZnO (refractive index: 2.0) was formed as a reflective layer by sputtering to obtain a preliminary laminate . An EVA film (F1) and a glass plate (G1) were sequentially stacked on the colored print decoration layer (P2) of the grain pattern of this preliminary laminate, to obtain a temporary laminate. The temporary laminate was placed in a film bag, and the mouth of the bag was sealed by heating under vacuum to form a vacuum pack, which was heat-pressed at 100 ° C. for 2 hours. The laminated body after thermocompression bonding is taken out of the bag, and a glass plate (G1) / EVA film (F1) / ZnO reflective layer (R2) / transparent uneven printed layer (P1-8) having a laminated structure as shown in FIG. 7 ) / A laminated body of colored printed decorative layer of wood grain (P2) / glass plate (G1) was obtained. The level of stereoscopic vision was visually evaluated for the obtained laminate.
When the obtained laminate is viewed from the side of the glass plate (G1) stacked on the EVA film (F1), the curves of the plurality of convex portions included in the transparent concavo-convex printing layer (P1) before coloring printing of wood grain pattern The three-dimensional view was made so that the portion where the parts were connected was bulging toward the front side or the back side, the depth more than the thickness of the glass was felt, and the designability was high.
例4で得られた積層体の透明凹凸印刷層(P1-8)上に、スパッタ法により反射層としてZnO(屈折率:2.0)を60nm厚成膜して、予備積層体を得た。この予備積層体の木目柄の着色印刷加飾層(P2)上に、EVAフィルム(F1)とガラス板(G1)とを順次重ねて仮積層体を得た。この仮積層体をフィルムの袋の中に入れ、真空中で袋の口を加熱により封止して真空パックを作り、それを100℃で2時間加熱圧着した。加熱圧着後の積層体を袋から取り出し、図7に示したような積層構造を有する、ガラス板(G1)/EVAフィルム(F1)/ZnO反射層(R2)/透明凹凸印刷層(P1-8)/木目柄の着色印刷加飾層(P2)/ガラス板(G1)の積層体を得た。得られた積層体について、立体視のレベルを目視評価した。
得られた積層体をEVAフィルム(F1)上に重ねたガラス板(G1)側から目視したとき、木目柄の着色印刷の手前で透明凹凸印刷層(P1)に含まれる複数の凸部の曲部が連なる部分が手前側または奥側に膨らんでいるように立体的に視認され、ガラス厚以上の奥行が感じられ、意匠性が高かった。 [Example 12]
On the transparent asperity printed layer (P1-8) of the laminate obtained in Example 4, 60 nm of ZnO (refractive index: 2.0) was formed as a reflective layer by sputtering to obtain a preliminary laminate . An EVA film (F1) and a glass plate (G1) were sequentially stacked on the colored print decoration layer (P2) of the grain pattern of this preliminary laminate, to obtain a temporary laminate. The temporary laminate was placed in a film bag, and the mouth of the bag was sealed by heating under vacuum to form a vacuum pack, which was heat-pressed at 100 ° C. for 2 hours. The laminated body after thermocompression bonding is taken out of the bag, and a glass plate (G1) / EVA film (F1) / ZnO reflective layer (R2) / transparent uneven printed layer (P1-8) having a laminated structure as shown in FIG. 7 ) / A laminated body of colored printed decorative layer of wood grain (P2) / glass plate (G1) was obtained. The level of stereoscopic vision was visually evaluated for the obtained laminate.
When the obtained laminate is viewed from the side of the glass plate (G1) stacked on the EVA film (F1), the curves of the plurality of convex portions included in the transparent concavo-convex printing layer (P1) before coloring printing of wood grain pattern The three-dimensional view was made so that the portion where the parts were connected was bulging toward the front side or the back side, the depth more than the thickness of the glass was felt, and the designability was high.
[例13]
例4で得られた積層体の透明凹凸印刷層(P1-8)上に、スパッタ法により反射層としてZnO(屈折率:2.0)を60nm厚成膜して、UVプリンターを使用して木目柄の着色印刷加飾層(P2)を形成して、予備積層体を得た。この予備積層体の木目柄の着色印刷加飾層(P2)上に、EVAフィルム(F1)とガラス板(G2)とを順次重ねて仮積層体を得た。この仮積層体をフィルムの袋の中に入れ、真空中で袋の口を加熱により封止して真空パックを作り、それを100℃で2時間加熱圧着した。加熱圧着後の積層体を袋から取り出し、図8に示したような積層構造を有する、ガラス板(G1)/EVAフィルム(F1)/木目柄の着色印刷加飾層(P2)/ZnO反射層(R2)/透明凹凸印刷層(P1)/木目柄の着色印刷加飾層(P2)/ガラス板(G1)の積層体を得た。得られた積層体について、立体視のレベルを目視評価した。
得られた積層体をEVAフィルム(F1)上に重ねたガラス板(G1)側から目視したとき、木目柄の着色印刷は、透明凹凸印刷層(P1)に含まれる複数の凸部の曲部が連なる部分が手前側または奥側に膨らんでいるように立体的に視認され、ガラス厚以上の奥行が感じられ、意匠性が高かった。 [Example 13]
Using a UV printer, ZnO (refractive index: 2.0) is deposited to a thickness of 60 nm as a reflective layer on the transparent asperity printed layer (P1-8) of the laminate obtained in Example 4 by sputtering A colored printed decorative layer (P2) of wood grain pattern was formed to obtain a preliminary laminate. An EVA film (F1) and a glass plate (G2) were sequentially stacked on the colored print decoration layer (P2) of the grain pattern of this preliminary laminate, to obtain a temporary laminate. The temporary laminate was placed in a film bag, and the mouth of the bag was sealed by heating under vacuum to form a vacuum pack, which was heat-pressed at 100 ° C. for 2 hours. The laminate after thermocompression bonding is taken out of the bag, and a glass plate (G1) / EVA film (F1) / wood-patterned colored printed decorative layer (P2) / ZnO reflective layer having a laminated structure as shown in FIG. 8 A laminate of (R2) / transparent uneven printed layer (P1) / colored and printed decorative layer with grain pattern (P2) / glass plate (G1) was obtained. The level of stereoscopic vision was visually evaluated for the obtained laminate.
When the obtained laminate is viewed from the side of the glass plate (G1) stacked on the EVA film (F1), the colored print of wood grain pattern is a curved portion of a plurality of convex portions included in the transparent uneven print layer (P1) The three-dimensional view was made as if the part where was bulging toward the front side or the back side, the depth more than the glass thickness was felt, and the designability was high.
例4で得られた積層体の透明凹凸印刷層(P1-8)上に、スパッタ法により反射層としてZnO(屈折率:2.0)を60nm厚成膜して、UVプリンターを使用して木目柄の着色印刷加飾層(P2)を形成して、予備積層体を得た。この予備積層体の木目柄の着色印刷加飾層(P2)上に、EVAフィルム(F1)とガラス板(G2)とを順次重ねて仮積層体を得た。この仮積層体をフィルムの袋の中に入れ、真空中で袋の口を加熱により封止して真空パックを作り、それを100℃で2時間加熱圧着した。加熱圧着後の積層体を袋から取り出し、図8に示したような積層構造を有する、ガラス板(G1)/EVAフィルム(F1)/木目柄の着色印刷加飾層(P2)/ZnO反射層(R2)/透明凹凸印刷層(P1)/木目柄の着色印刷加飾層(P2)/ガラス板(G1)の積層体を得た。得られた積層体について、立体視のレベルを目視評価した。
得られた積層体をEVAフィルム(F1)上に重ねたガラス板(G1)側から目視したとき、木目柄の着色印刷は、透明凹凸印刷層(P1)に含まれる複数の凸部の曲部が連なる部分が手前側または奥側に膨らんでいるように立体的に視認され、ガラス厚以上の奥行が感じられ、意匠性が高かった。 [Example 13]
Using a UV printer, ZnO (refractive index: 2.0) is deposited to a thickness of 60 nm as a reflective layer on the transparent asperity printed layer (P1-8) of the laminate obtained in Example 4 by sputtering A colored printed decorative layer (P2) of wood grain pattern was formed to obtain a preliminary laminate. An EVA film (F1) and a glass plate (G2) were sequentially stacked on the colored print decoration layer (P2) of the grain pattern of this preliminary laminate, to obtain a temporary laminate. The temporary laminate was placed in a film bag, and the mouth of the bag was sealed by heating under vacuum to form a vacuum pack, which was heat-pressed at 100 ° C. for 2 hours. The laminate after thermocompression bonding is taken out of the bag, and a glass plate (G1) / EVA film (F1) / wood-patterned colored printed decorative layer (P2) / ZnO reflective layer having a laminated structure as shown in FIG. 8 A laminate of (R2) / transparent uneven printed layer (P1) / colored and printed decorative layer with grain pattern (P2) / glass plate (G1) was obtained. The level of stereoscopic vision was visually evaluated for the obtained laminate.
When the obtained laminate is viewed from the side of the glass plate (G1) stacked on the EVA film (F1), the colored print of wood grain pattern is a curved portion of a plurality of convex portions included in the transparent uneven print layer (P1) The three-dimensional view was made as if the part where was bulging toward the front side or the back side, the depth more than the glass thickness was felt, and the designability was high.
[例14~16]
UVプリンターを使用し、ガラス板(G1)上に、屈折率が1.51のクリアーインク(LH-100-CL-BA)を用いて、図13(例14)、図14(例15)、または図15(例16)に示したパターンの透明凹凸印刷層((P14)~(P16)のうちいずれか)を形成し、透明凹凸印刷層((P14)~(P16)のうちいずれか)/ガラス板(G1)の積層体を得た。 [Examples 14 to 16]
Fig. 13 (Example 14), Fig. 14 (Example 15), using a UV ink and using clear ink (LH-100-CL-BA) having a refractive index of 1.51 on a glass plate (G1). Or form the transparent concavo-convex printing layer (one of (P14)-(P16)) of the pattern which is shown in Figure 15 (example 16), transparent concavo-convex printing layer (any of (P14)-(P16)) / Laminate of glass plate (G1) was obtained.
UVプリンターを使用し、ガラス板(G1)上に、屈折率が1.51のクリアーインク(LH-100-CL-BA)を用いて、図13(例14)、図14(例15)、または図15(例16)に示したパターンの透明凹凸印刷層((P14)~(P16)のうちいずれか)を形成し、透明凹凸印刷層((P14)~(P16)のうちいずれか)/ガラス板(G1)の積層体を得た。 [Examples 14 to 16]
Fig. 13 (Example 14), Fig. 14 (Example 15), using a UV ink and using clear ink (LH-100-CL-BA) having a refractive index of 1.51 on a glass plate (G1). Or form the transparent concavo-convex printing layer (one of (P14)-(P16)) of the pattern which is shown in Figure 15 (example 16), transparent concavo-convex printing layer (any of (P14)-(P16)) / Laminate of glass plate (G1) was obtained.
透明凹凸印刷層(P14)~(P16)は、平面視にて、曲部を介してなめらかに接続された第1の方向に向かう第1の直線部と第2の方向に向かう第2の直線部とからなるライン状の複数の凸部が、等ピッチで周期的に形成された複数の凸部群を有する。
透明凹凸印刷層(P14)~(P16)はそれぞれ、1つの中心部から互いに重なり合わずに異なる複数の径方向に放射状に延びる4個(例14)、8個(例15)、36個(例16)の凸部群を含む。
これらの例において、互いに隣り合う第1の凸部群と第2の凸部群に着目し、第1の凸部群において、間隔を空けて複数形成された凸部の曲部が連なる方向を第1の直線方向とし、第2の凸部群において、間隔を空けて複数形成された凸部の曲部が連なる方向を第2の直線方向とし、第1の直線方向と第2の直線方向とのなす角をθとしたとき、θはそれぞれ、90°(例14)、45°(例15)、10°(例16)である。
これらの例において、各凸部群の最大幅Wmaxは2.5mmとした。また、各凸部群の径方向長さRはそれぞれ、5mm(例14)、10mm(例15)、30mm(例16)とした。
これらの例では、第1の凸部群と第2の凸部群との境界線が、第1の直線方向と第2の直線方向との交点から延びる第1の直線方向と第2の直線方向との二等分線に一致する。 The transparent concavo-convex printing layers (P14) to (P16) are a first straight part directed in a first direction smoothly connected via a curved part and a second straight line directed in a second direction in plan view. A plurality of line-shaped convex parts consisting of parts have a plurality of convex part groups periodically formed at equal pitches.
The transparent concavo-convex printing layers (P14) to (P16) are respectively four (example 14), eight (example 15), 36 (36 examples) radially extending in different radial directions from one central portion without overlapping each other. The convex part group of Example 16) is included.
In these examples, paying attention to the first convex portion group and the second convex portion group adjacent to each other, in the first convex portion group, the direction in which the curved portions of the convex portions formed at intervals are continued In the second group of convex portions, the direction in which the curved portions of the plurality of convex portions formed at intervals are continuous is set as a second linear direction, and the first linear direction and the second linear direction. Is 90 ° (Example 14), 45 ° (Example 15), and 10 ° (Example 16), where θ is the angle between them.
In these examples, the maximum width W max of each convex portion group is 2.5 mm. Moreover, radial direction length R of each convex part group was 5 mm (Example 14), 10 mm (Example 15), and 30 mm (Example 16), respectively.
In these examples, the first straight line direction and the second straight line extend from the intersection of the first straight line direction and the second straight line direction with the boundary between the first convex group and the second convex group. Match the bisector with the direction.
透明凹凸印刷層(P14)~(P16)はそれぞれ、1つの中心部から互いに重なり合わずに異なる複数の径方向に放射状に延びる4個(例14)、8個(例15)、36個(例16)の凸部群を含む。
これらの例において、互いに隣り合う第1の凸部群と第2の凸部群に着目し、第1の凸部群において、間隔を空けて複数形成された凸部の曲部が連なる方向を第1の直線方向とし、第2の凸部群において、間隔を空けて複数形成された凸部の曲部が連なる方向を第2の直線方向とし、第1の直線方向と第2の直線方向とのなす角をθとしたとき、θはそれぞれ、90°(例14)、45°(例15)、10°(例16)である。
これらの例において、各凸部群の最大幅Wmaxは2.5mmとした。また、各凸部群の径方向長さRはそれぞれ、5mm(例14)、10mm(例15)、30mm(例16)とした。
これらの例では、第1の凸部群と第2の凸部群との境界線が、第1の直線方向と第2の直線方向との交点から延びる第1の直線方向と第2の直線方向との二等分線に一致する。 The transparent concavo-convex printing layers (P14) to (P16) are a first straight part directed in a first direction smoothly connected via a curved part and a second straight line directed in a second direction in plan view. A plurality of line-shaped convex parts consisting of parts have a plurality of convex part groups periodically formed at equal pitches.
The transparent concavo-convex printing layers (P14) to (P16) are respectively four (example 14), eight (example 15), 36 (36 examples) radially extending in different radial directions from one central portion without overlapping each other. The convex part group of Example 16) is included.
In these examples, paying attention to the first convex portion group and the second convex portion group adjacent to each other, in the first convex portion group, the direction in which the curved portions of the convex portions formed at intervals are continued In the second group of convex portions, the direction in which the curved portions of the plurality of convex portions formed at intervals are continuous is set as a second linear direction, and the first linear direction and the second linear direction. Is 90 ° (Example 14), 45 ° (Example 15), and 10 ° (Example 16), where θ is the angle between them.
In these examples, the maximum width W max of each convex portion group is 2.5 mm. Moreover, radial direction length R of each convex part group was 5 mm (Example 14), 10 mm (Example 15), and 30 mm (Example 16), respectively.
In these examples, the first straight line direction and the second straight line extend from the intersection of the first straight line direction and the second straight line direction with the boundary between the first convex group and the second convex group. Match the bisector with the direction.
各例についてそれぞれ、1本のライン状の凸部の各種データを表2に示す。
なお、これらの例では、1つの凸部群内でも、凸部の長さが変化する部分があるため、1つの凸部群内で、同じ長さで複数並んだ部分の凸部のデータを記載してある。
また、これらの例では、末端部を曲部としたので、「互いに隣り合う曲部」として、第1の直線部と第2の直線部の間の曲部と一方の末端部の曲部を採用した。末端部の曲部の曲げ角度は、135°とした。
これらの例で得られた積層体はいずれも、ガラス板(G1)側から目視したとき、彫刻を入れた切子ガラスのような外観が得られ、意匠性が高かった。 Table 2 shows various data of one linear convex portion for each example.
In these examples, since there is a portion where the length of the convex portion changes even in one convex portion group, data of convex portions of a plurality of portions of the same length are arranged in one convex portion group. It has been described.
Further, in these examples, since the end portions are curved portions, the “curved portion between the first straight portion and the second straight portion and the curved portion at one end portion are used as“ the adjacent curved portions ”. Adopted. The bending angle of the end curve was 135 °.
Each of the laminates obtained in these examples had an appearance like a sculpted facet glass when viewed from the glass plate (G1) side, and the designability was high.
なお、これらの例では、1つの凸部群内でも、凸部の長さが変化する部分があるため、1つの凸部群内で、同じ長さで複数並んだ部分の凸部のデータを記載してある。
また、これらの例では、末端部を曲部としたので、「互いに隣り合う曲部」として、第1の直線部と第2の直線部の間の曲部と一方の末端部の曲部を採用した。末端部の曲部の曲げ角度は、135°とした。
これらの例で得られた積層体はいずれも、ガラス板(G1)側から目視したとき、彫刻を入れた切子ガラスのような外観が得られ、意匠性が高かった。 Table 2 shows various data of one linear convex portion for each example.
In these examples, since there is a portion where the length of the convex portion changes even in one convex portion group, data of convex portions of a plurality of portions of the same length are arranged in one convex portion group. It has been described.
Further, in these examples, since the end portions are curved portions, the “curved portion between the first straight portion and the second straight portion and the curved portion at one end portion are used as“ the adjacent curved portions ”. Adopted. The bending angle of the end curve was 135 °.
Each of the laminates obtained in these examples had an appearance like a sculpted facet glass when viewed from the glass plate (G1) side, and the designability was high.
[例17]
透明凹凸印刷層のパターンを図13から図16に示すものに変更した以外は例14と同様にして、透明凹凸印刷層(P17)/ガラス板(G1)の積層体を得た。
この例では、凸部群22A、22Cの各凸部の設計は例14と同様に設定したまま、凸部群22B、22Dの各凸部の直線部の長さを0.68mm短くすることで、凸部群22B、22Dの最大幅を凸部群22A、22Cの最大幅よりも小さくした。なお、ここで言う各凸部の直線部の長さは、1つの凸部群内で、同じ長さで複数並んだ部分の凸部のデータである。この例では、図示するように、第1の凸部群と第2の凸部群との境界線MA1は、第1の直線方向と第2の直線方向との交点から延びる第1の直線方向と第2の直線方向との二等分線NA1を平行移動させた直線である。
このように設計して得られた積層体は、例14~16と同様、ガラス板(G1)側から目視したとき、彫刻を入れた切子ガラスのような外観が得られ、意匠性が高かった。 [Example 17]
A laminate of transparent asperity print layer (P17) / glass plate (G1) was obtained in the same manner as in Example 14 except that the pattern of the transparent asperity print layer was changed to those shown in FIG. 13 to FIG.
In this example, while setting the design of each of theconvex portions 22A and 22C in the same manner as in Example 14, the length of the linear portion of each convex of the convex portions 22B and 22D is shortened by 0.68 mm. The maximum width of the convex portions 22B and 22D is smaller than the maximum width of the convex portions 22A and 22C. In addition, the length of the linear part of each convex part said here is the data of the convex part of the part arranged in multiple numbers by the same length in one convex part group. In this example, as illustrated, the boundary line MA1 between the first convex group and the second convex group is a first linear direction extending from the intersection of the first linear direction and the second linear direction. And a second straight line direction in which the bisector NA1 is moved in parallel.
The laminate obtained by designing in this manner, like the examples 14 to 16, when viewed from the side of the glass plate (G1), an appearance like a facetted glass having an engraving was obtained, and the designability was high.
透明凹凸印刷層のパターンを図13から図16に示すものに変更した以外は例14と同様にして、透明凹凸印刷層(P17)/ガラス板(G1)の積層体を得た。
この例では、凸部群22A、22Cの各凸部の設計は例14と同様に設定したまま、凸部群22B、22Dの各凸部の直線部の長さを0.68mm短くすることで、凸部群22B、22Dの最大幅を凸部群22A、22Cの最大幅よりも小さくした。なお、ここで言う各凸部の直線部の長さは、1つの凸部群内で、同じ長さで複数並んだ部分の凸部のデータである。この例では、図示するように、第1の凸部群と第2の凸部群との境界線MA1は、第1の直線方向と第2の直線方向との交点から延びる第1の直線方向と第2の直線方向との二等分線NA1を平行移動させた直線である。
このように設計して得られた積層体は、例14~16と同様、ガラス板(G1)側から目視したとき、彫刻を入れた切子ガラスのような外観が得られ、意匠性が高かった。 [Example 17]
A laminate of transparent asperity print layer (P17) / glass plate (G1) was obtained in the same manner as in Example 14 except that the pattern of the transparent asperity print layer was changed to those shown in FIG. 13 to FIG.
In this example, while setting the design of each of the
The laminate obtained by designing in this manner, like the examples 14 to 16, when viewed from the side of the glass plate (G1), an appearance like a facetted glass having an engraving was obtained, and the designability was high.
[例17~20]
グラビア印刷により、ポリカーボネートフィルム(F3)上に、屈折率が1.51のクリアーインク(LH-100-CL-BA)を用いて、図13に示したパターンの透明凹凸印刷層((P17)~(P20)のいずれか)を形成し、透明凹凸印刷層((P17)~(P20)のうちいずれか)/ポリカーボネートフィルム(F3)の積層体を得た。次に、これらの積層体のポリカーボネートフィルムの透明凹凸印刷層を形成した面とは反対側の面に透明両面テープ(T1)によりガラス板(G1)を空気が入らないように貼り合わせ、図17に示したような積層構造を有する、透明凹凸印刷層((P17)~(P20)のうちいずれか)/ポリカーボネートフィルム(F3)/透明両面テープ(T1)/ガラス板(G1)の積層体を得た。 [Examples 17 to 20]
Using a clear ink (LH-100-CL-BA) having a refractive index of 1.51 on a polycarbonate film (F3) by gravure printing, the transparent concavo-convex printing layer ((P17) to (P17) of the pattern shown in FIG. One of (P20) was formed to obtain a laminate of a transparent unevenly printed layer (one of (P17) to (P20)) / polycarbonate film (F3). Next, a glass plate (G1) is laminated with a transparent double-sided tape (T1) on the surface opposite to the surface on which the transparent asperity printed layer of the polycarbonate film of these laminates is formed, so that air does not enter. A laminate of a transparent concavo-convex printed layer (any one of (P17) to (P20)) / polycarbonate film (F3) / transparent double-sided tape (T1) / glass plate (G1) having a laminated structure as shown in Obtained.
グラビア印刷により、ポリカーボネートフィルム(F3)上に、屈折率が1.51のクリアーインク(LH-100-CL-BA)を用いて、図13に示したパターンの透明凹凸印刷層((P17)~(P20)のいずれか)を形成し、透明凹凸印刷層((P17)~(P20)のうちいずれか)/ポリカーボネートフィルム(F3)の積層体を得た。次に、これらの積層体のポリカーボネートフィルムの透明凹凸印刷層を形成した面とは反対側の面に透明両面テープ(T1)によりガラス板(G1)を空気が入らないように貼り合わせ、図17に示したような積層構造を有する、透明凹凸印刷層((P17)~(P20)のうちいずれか)/ポリカーボネートフィルム(F3)/透明両面テープ(T1)/ガラス板(G1)の積層体を得た。 [Examples 17 to 20]
Using a clear ink (LH-100-CL-BA) having a refractive index of 1.51 on a polycarbonate film (F3) by gravure printing, the transparent concavo-convex printing layer ((P17) to (P17) of the pattern shown in FIG. One of (P20) was formed to obtain a laminate of a transparent unevenly printed layer (one of (P17) to (P20)) / polycarbonate film (F3). Next, a glass plate (G1) is laminated with a transparent double-sided tape (T1) on the surface opposite to the surface on which the transparent asperity printed layer of the polycarbonate film of these laminates is formed, so that air does not enter. A laminate of a transparent concavo-convex printed layer (any one of (P17) to (P20)) / polycarbonate film (F3) / transparent double-sided tape (T1) / glass plate (G1) having a laminated structure as shown in Obtained.
透明凹凸印刷層(P17)~(P20)は、平面視にて、曲部を介してなめらかに接続された第1の方向に向かう第1の直線部と第2の方向に向かう第2の直線部とからなるライン状の複数の凸部が、等ピッチで周期的に形成された複数の凸部群を有する。
透明凹凸印刷層(P17)~(P20)は、1つの中心部から互いに重なり合わずに異なる複数の径方向に放射状に延びる4個の凸部群を含む。
これらの例において、互いに隣り合う第1の凸部群と第2の凸部群に着目し、第1の凸部群において、間隔を空けて複数形成された凸部の曲部が連なる方向を第1の直線方向とし、第2の凸部群において、間隔を空けて複数形成された凸部の曲部が連なる方向を第2の直線方向とし、第1の直線方向と第2の直線方向とのなす角をθとしたとき、θは90°である。
これらの例において、各凸部群の最大幅Wmaxは2.5mmとした。また、各凸部群の径方向長さRはそれぞれ、5mm(例14)、10mm(例15)、30mm(例16)とした。 The transparent concavo-convex printing layers (P17) to (P20) are a first straight part directed in a first direction smoothly connected via a curved part and a second straight line directed in a second direction in plan view. A plurality of line-shaped convex parts consisting of parts have a plurality of convex part groups periodically formed at equal pitches.
The transparent asperity print layers (P17) to (P20) include four convex groups radially extending in different radial directions from one central portion without overlapping each other.
In these examples, paying attention to the first convex portion group and the second convex portion group adjacent to each other, in the first convex portion group, the direction in which the curved portions of the convex portions formed at intervals are continued In the second group of convex portions, the direction in which the curved portions of the plurality of convex portions formed at intervals are continuous is set as a second linear direction, and the first linear direction and the second linear direction. Where θ is 90 °.
In these examples, the maximum width W max of each convex portion group is 2.5 mm. Moreover, radial direction length R of each convex part group was 5 mm (Example 14), 10 mm (Example 15), and 30 mm (Example 16), respectively.
透明凹凸印刷層(P17)~(P20)は、1つの中心部から互いに重なり合わずに異なる複数の径方向に放射状に延びる4個の凸部群を含む。
これらの例において、互いに隣り合う第1の凸部群と第2の凸部群に着目し、第1の凸部群において、間隔を空けて複数形成された凸部の曲部が連なる方向を第1の直線方向とし、第2の凸部群において、間隔を空けて複数形成された凸部の曲部が連なる方向を第2の直線方向とし、第1の直線方向と第2の直線方向とのなす角をθとしたとき、θは90°である。
これらの例において、各凸部群の最大幅Wmaxは2.5mmとした。また、各凸部群の径方向長さRはそれぞれ、5mm(例14)、10mm(例15)、30mm(例16)とした。 The transparent concavo-convex printing layers (P17) to (P20) are a first straight part directed in a first direction smoothly connected via a curved part and a second straight line directed in a second direction in plan view. A plurality of line-shaped convex parts consisting of parts have a plurality of convex part groups periodically formed at equal pitches.
The transparent asperity print layers (P17) to (P20) include four convex groups radially extending in different radial directions from one central portion without overlapping each other.
In these examples, paying attention to the first convex portion group and the second convex portion group adjacent to each other, in the first convex portion group, the direction in which the curved portions of the convex portions formed at intervals are continued In the second group of convex portions, the direction in which the curved portions of the plurality of convex portions formed at intervals are continuous is set as a second linear direction, and the first linear direction and the second linear direction. Where θ is 90 °.
In these examples, the maximum width W max of each convex portion group is 2.5 mm. Moreover, radial direction length R of each convex part group was 5 mm (Example 14), 10 mm (Example 15), and 30 mm (Example 16), respectively.
これらの例では、第1の凸部群と第2の凸部群との境界線が、第1の直線方向と第2の直線方向との交点から延びる第1の直線方向と第2の直線方向との二等分線に一致する。
各例についてそれぞれ、1本のライン状の凸部の各種データを表3に示す。
なお、これらの例では、1つの凸部群内でも、凸部の長さが変化する部分があるため、1つの凸部群内で、同じ長さで複数並んだ部分の凸部のデータを記載してある。
また、これらの例では、末端部を曲部としたので、「互いに隣り合う曲部」として、第1の直線部と第2の直線部の間の曲部と一方の末端部の曲部を採用した。末端部の曲部の曲げ角度は、135°とした。
例17~20で得られた積層体をガラス板(G1)側から目視したとき、いずれも彫刻を入れた切子ガラスのような外観が得られ、意匠性が高かった。また、ガラス板(G1)が虹色を呈して見え、意匠性が高かった。この虹色は例17、18の積層体よりも例19、20の積層体においてコントラストが強く見えた。透明凹凸印刷層の凸部の線幅(L)および凸部の間隔(S)が小さくなるほど、虹色のコントラストが強くなることが確認できた。 In these examples, the first straight line direction and the second straight line extend from the intersection of the first straight line direction and the second straight line direction with the boundary between the first convex group and the second convex group. Match the bisector with the direction.
Table 3 shows various data of one linear convex portion for each example.
In these examples, since there is a portion where the length of the convex portion changes even in one convex portion group, data of convex portions of a plurality of portions of the same length are arranged in one convex portion group. It has been described.
Further, in these examples, since the end portions are curved portions, the “curved portion between the first straight portion and the second straight portion and the curved portion at one end portion are used as“ the adjacent curved portions ”. Adopted. The bending angle of the end curve was 135 °.
When the laminate obtained in each of Examples 17 to 20 was visually observed from the side of the glass plate (G1), an appearance like a facetted glass having an engraving was obtained, and the designability was high. Further, the glass plate (G1) appeared to be iridescent, and the designability was high. This rainbow color appeared to have a stronger contrast in the laminates of Examples 19 and 20 than in the laminates of Examples 17 and 18. It was confirmed that the iridescent contrast becomes stronger as the line width (L) of the convex portions and the interval (S) of the convex portions of the transparent asperity printed layer become smaller.
各例についてそれぞれ、1本のライン状の凸部の各種データを表3に示す。
なお、これらの例では、1つの凸部群内でも、凸部の長さが変化する部分があるため、1つの凸部群内で、同じ長さで複数並んだ部分の凸部のデータを記載してある。
また、これらの例では、末端部を曲部としたので、「互いに隣り合う曲部」として、第1の直線部と第2の直線部の間の曲部と一方の末端部の曲部を採用した。末端部の曲部の曲げ角度は、135°とした。
例17~20で得られた積層体をガラス板(G1)側から目視したとき、いずれも彫刻を入れた切子ガラスのような外観が得られ、意匠性が高かった。また、ガラス板(G1)が虹色を呈して見え、意匠性が高かった。この虹色は例17、18の積層体よりも例19、20の積層体においてコントラストが強く見えた。透明凹凸印刷層の凸部の線幅(L)および凸部の間隔(S)が小さくなるほど、虹色のコントラストが強くなることが確認できた。 In these examples, the first straight line direction and the second straight line extend from the intersection of the first straight line direction and the second straight line direction with the boundary between the first convex group and the second convex group. Match the bisector with the direction.
Table 3 shows various data of one linear convex portion for each example.
In these examples, since there is a portion where the length of the convex portion changes even in one convex portion group, data of convex portions of a plurality of portions of the same length are arranged in one convex portion group. It has been described.
Further, in these examples, since the end portions are curved portions, the “curved portion between the first straight portion and the second straight portion and the curved portion at one end portion are used as“ the adjacent curved portions ”. Adopted. The bending angle of the end curve was 135 °.
When the laminate obtained in each of Examples 17 to 20 was visually observed from the side of the glass plate (G1), an appearance like a facetted glass having an engraving was obtained, and the designability was high. Further, the glass plate (G1) appeared to be iridescent, and the designability was high. This rainbow color appeared to have a stronger contrast in the laminates of Examples 19 and 20 than in the laminates of Examples 17 and 18. It was confirmed that the iridescent contrast becomes stronger as the line width (L) of the convex portions and the interval (S) of the convex portions of the transparent asperity printed layer become smaller.
[例21]
例19で得られた積層体の透明凹凸印刷層(P19)上に、スパッタ法により反射層としてZnS(屈折率:2.3)を50nm厚成膜し、図18に示したような積層構造を有する、ZnS反射層(R3)/透明凹凸印刷層((P19)/ポリカーボネートフィルム(F3)/透明両面テープ(T1)/ガラス板(G1)の積層体を得た。得られた積層体をガラス板(G1)側から目視したとき、彫刻を入れた切子ガラスのような外観が得られ、意匠性が高かった。また、得られた積層体は、例19で得られた積層体に対して、透明凹凸印刷層に沿った反射が強くなり、立体視感が強調され、意匠性が高かった。
[例22]
例19と同様の方法により透明凹凸印刷層(P19)/ポリカーボネートフィルム(F3)の積層体を得た。次に、透明凹凸印刷層(P19)上に、スパッタ法により反射層としてZnS(屈折率:2.3)を50nm厚成膜し、ZnS反射層(R3)/透明凹凸印刷層((P19)/ポリカーボネートフィルム(F3)を得た。次に、この積層体のポリカーボネートフィルム(F3)の透明凹凸印刷層(P19)を形成した面とは反対側の面に、平面視において透明凹凸印刷層(P19)が形成されていない領域にUVプリンターを用いて青色のカラー印刷加飾層(P3)を印刷し、ZnS反射層(R3)/透明凹凸印刷層((P19)/ポリカーボネートフィルム(F3)/カラー印刷加飾層(P3)の積層体を得た。次に、この積層体のカラー印刷加飾層(P3)上に透明両面テープ(T1)によりガラス板(G1)を空気が入らないように貼り合わせ、図19に示したような積層構造を有する、ZnS反射層(R3)/透明凹凸印刷層(P19)/ポリカーボネートフィルム(F3)/カラー印刷加飾層(P3)/透明両面テープ(T1)/ガラス板(G1)の積層体を得た。得られた積層体をガラス板(G1)側から目視したとき、表面が着色されたガラスに彫刻を入れた切子ガラスのように見え、意匠性が高かった。
[例23]
例22と同様の方法によりZnS反射層(R3)/透明凹凸印刷層((P19)/ポリカーボネートフィルム(F3)/カラー印刷加飾層(P3)を得た。次に、このZnS反射層(R3)上に透明両面テープ(T1)によりガラス板(G1)を空気が入らないように貼り合わせ、図20に示したような積層構造を有する、ガラス板(G1)/透明両面テープ(T1)/ZnS反射層(R3)/透明凹凸印刷層(P19)/ポリカーボネートフィルム(F3)/カラー印刷加飾層(P3)の積層体を得た。得られた積層体をガラス板(G1)側から目視したとき、着色されたガラスに彫刻を入れた着色層のある切子ガラスのような外観が得られ、意匠性が高かった。
[例24]
例19で得られた積層体の透明凹凸印刷層(P19)のポリカーボネートフィルム(F3)がある面とは反対側の面に、平面視において透明凹凸印刷層(P19)が形成されていない領域にUVプリンターを用いて青色のカラー印刷加飾層(P3)を印刷し、図21に示したような積層構造を有する、カラー印刷加飾層(P3)/透明凹凸印刷層(P19)/ポリカーボネートフィルム(F3)/透明両面テープ(T1)/ガラス板(G1)の積層体を得た。得られた積層体をガラス板(G1)側から目視したとき、表面が着色されたガラスに彫刻を入れた着色層のある切子ガラスのような外観が得られ、意匠性が高かった。
[例25]
例24で得られた積層体のカラー印刷加飾層(P3)上に、スパッタ法により反射層としてZnS(屈折率:2.3)を50nm厚成膜し、図22に示したような積層構造を有する、ZnS反射層(R3)/カラー印刷加飾層(P3)/透明凹凸印刷層(P19)/ポリカーボネートフィルム(F3)/透明両面テープ(T1)/ガラス板(G1)の積層体を得た。得られた積層体をガラス板(G1)側から目視したとき、表面が着色されたガラスに彫刻を入れた着色層のある切子ガラスのような外観が得られ、意匠性が高かった。また、得られた積層体は、例24で得られた積層体に対して、透明凹凸印刷層に沿った反射が強くなり、立体視感が強調され、意匠性が高かった。 [Example 21]
A 50 nm thick film of ZnS (refractive index: 2.3) was formed as a reflective layer on the transparent concavo-convex printed layer (P19) of the laminate obtained in Example 19 as a reflective layer by a sputtering method, as shown in FIG. A laminate of ZnS reflective layer (R3) / transparent uneven print layer ((P19) / polycarbonate film (F3) / transparent double-sided tape (T1) / glass plate (G1) having the above was obtained. When viewed from the side of the glass plate (G1), the appearance like a sculpted facetted glass was obtained and the designability was high, and the obtained laminate was to the laminate obtained in Example 19 The reflection along the transparent uneven print layer was intensified, the stereoscopic vision was emphasized, and the designability was high.
[Example 22]
A laminate of a transparent relief print layer (P19) / polycarbonate film (F3) was obtained in the same manner as in Example 19. Next, ZnS (refractive index: 2.3) is deposited to a thickness of 50 nm as a reflective layer on the transparent concavo-convex printed layer (P19) by sputtering method, ZnS reflective layer (R3) / transparent concavo-convex printed layer ((P19) Next, on the surface of the polycarbonate film (F3) of this laminate opposite to the surface on which the transparent asperity print layer (P19) was formed, a transparent asperity print layer (in plan view) Print a blue color print decoration layer (P3) in a region where P19) is not formed using a UV printer, and use ZnS reflective layer (R3) / transparent concavo-convex print layer ((P19) / polycarbonate film (F3) / Next, a laminate of the color print decoration layer (P3) was obtained, and then, the glass plate (G1) was prevented from entering the air with the transparent double-sided tape (T1) on the color print decoration layer (P3) of this laminate. Stick to In addition, the ZnS reflective layer (R3) / the transparent concavo-convex printing layer (P19) / polycarbonate film (F3) / the color printing decorative layer (P3) / the transparent double-sided tape (T1) having a laminated structure as shown in FIG. When the obtained laminate is viewed from the side of the glass plate (G1), it looks like a faceted glass in which the surface is engraved on a colored glass, and the designability is obtained. it was high.
[Example 23]
A ZnS reflective layer (R3) / a transparent concavo-convex printed layer ((P19) / polycarbonate film (F3) / a color print decorative layer (P3) was obtained by the same method as in Example 22. Next, this ZnS reflective layer (R3) A transparent double-sided tape (T1) on top of the glass plate (G1) so as to prevent air from entering, and having a laminated structure as shown in FIG. 20, glass plate (G1) / transparent double-sided tape (T1) / A laminate of ZnS reflective layer (R3) / transparent uneven print layer (P19) / polycarbonate film (F3) / color print decoration layer (P3) was obtained, and the obtained laminate was observed from the glass plate (G1) side. When it did, the appearance like a faceted glass with the colored layer which put engraving on colored glass was obtained, and the designability was high.
[Example 24]
In the region on the other side of the transparent concavo-convex printing layer (P19) of the laminate obtained in Example 19 on the side opposite to the side with the polycarbonate film (F3), in the region where the transparent concavo-convex printing layer (P19) is not formed in plan view Color printing decoration layer (P3) / transparent concavo-convex printing layer (P19) / polycarbonate film having a laminated structure as shown in FIG. 21 in which a blue color printing decoration layer (P3) is printed using a UV printer A laminate of (F3) / transparent double-sided tape (T1) / glass plate (G1) was obtained. When the obtained laminate was viewed from the glass plate (G1) side, an appearance like a facet glass with a colored layer obtained by engraving a glass whose surface was colored was obtained, and the designability was high.
[Example 25]
On the color print decoration layer (P3) of the laminate obtained in Example 24, 50 nm thick ZnS (refractive index: 2.3) was formed as a reflective layer by sputtering, and lamination as shown in FIG. A laminate of ZnS reflective layer (R3) / color print decoration layer (P3) / transparent uneven print layer (P19) / polycarbonate film (F3) / transparent double-sided tape (T1) / glass plate (G1) having a structure Obtained. When the obtained laminate was viewed from the glass plate (G1) side, an appearance like a facet glass with a colored layer obtained by engraving a glass whose surface was colored was obtained, and the designability was high. Moreover, with respect to the laminate obtained in Example 24, in the laminate obtained, the reflection along the transparent concavo-convex printed layer was strong, the stereoscopic vision was emphasized, and the designability was high.
例19で得られた積層体の透明凹凸印刷層(P19)上に、スパッタ法により反射層としてZnS(屈折率:2.3)を50nm厚成膜し、図18に示したような積層構造を有する、ZnS反射層(R3)/透明凹凸印刷層((P19)/ポリカーボネートフィルム(F3)/透明両面テープ(T1)/ガラス板(G1)の積層体を得た。得られた積層体をガラス板(G1)側から目視したとき、彫刻を入れた切子ガラスのような外観が得られ、意匠性が高かった。また、得られた積層体は、例19で得られた積層体に対して、透明凹凸印刷層に沿った反射が強くなり、立体視感が強調され、意匠性が高かった。
[例22]
例19と同様の方法により透明凹凸印刷層(P19)/ポリカーボネートフィルム(F3)の積層体を得た。次に、透明凹凸印刷層(P19)上に、スパッタ法により反射層としてZnS(屈折率:2.3)を50nm厚成膜し、ZnS反射層(R3)/透明凹凸印刷層((P19)/ポリカーボネートフィルム(F3)を得た。次に、この積層体のポリカーボネートフィルム(F3)の透明凹凸印刷層(P19)を形成した面とは反対側の面に、平面視において透明凹凸印刷層(P19)が形成されていない領域にUVプリンターを用いて青色のカラー印刷加飾層(P3)を印刷し、ZnS反射層(R3)/透明凹凸印刷層((P19)/ポリカーボネートフィルム(F3)/カラー印刷加飾層(P3)の積層体を得た。次に、この積層体のカラー印刷加飾層(P3)上に透明両面テープ(T1)によりガラス板(G1)を空気が入らないように貼り合わせ、図19に示したような積層構造を有する、ZnS反射層(R3)/透明凹凸印刷層(P19)/ポリカーボネートフィルム(F3)/カラー印刷加飾層(P3)/透明両面テープ(T1)/ガラス板(G1)の積層体を得た。得られた積層体をガラス板(G1)側から目視したとき、表面が着色されたガラスに彫刻を入れた切子ガラスのように見え、意匠性が高かった。
[例23]
例22と同様の方法によりZnS反射層(R3)/透明凹凸印刷層((P19)/ポリカーボネートフィルム(F3)/カラー印刷加飾層(P3)を得た。次に、このZnS反射層(R3)上に透明両面テープ(T1)によりガラス板(G1)を空気が入らないように貼り合わせ、図20に示したような積層構造を有する、ガラス板(G1)/透明両面テープ(T1)/ZnS反射層(R3)/透明凹凸印刷層(P19)/ポリカーボネートフィルム(F3)/カラー印刷加飾層(P3)の積層体を得た。得られた積層体をガラス板(G1)側から目視したとき、着色されたガラスに彫刻を入れた着色層のある切子ガラスのような外観が得られ、意匠性が高かった。
[例24]
例19で得られた積層体の透明凹凸印刷層(P19)のポリカーボネートフィルム(F3)がある面とは反対側の面に、平面視において透明凹凸印刷層(P19)が形成されていない領域にUVプリンターを用いて青色のカラー印刷加飾層(P3)を印刷し、図21に示したような積層構造を有する、カラー印刷加飾層(P3)/透明凹凸印刷層(P19)/ポリカーボネートフィルム(F3)/透明両面テープ(T1)/ガラス板(G1)の積層体を得た。得られた積層体をガラス板(G1)側から目視したとき、表面が着色されたガラスに彫刻を入れた着色層のある切子ガラスのような外観が得られ、意匠性が高かった。
[例25]
例24で得られた積層体のカラー印刷加飾層(P3)上に、スパッタ法により反射層としてZnS(屈折率:2.3)を50nm厚成膜し、図22に示したような積層構造を有する、ZnS反射層(R3)/カラー印刷加飾層(P3)/透明凹凸印刷層(P19)/ポリカーボネートフィルム(F3)/透明両面テープ(T1)/ガラス板(G1)の積層体を得た。得られた積層体をガラス板(G1)側から目視したとき、表面が着色されたガラスに彫刻を入れた着色層のある切子ガラスのような外観が得られ、意匠性が高かった。また、得られた積層体は、例24で得られた積層体に対して、透明凹凸印刷層に沿った反射が強くなり、立体視感が強調され、意匠性が高かった。 [Example 21]
A 50 nm thick film of ZnS (refractive index: 2.3) was formed as a reflective layer on the transparent concavo-convex printed layer (P19) of the laminate obtained in Example 19 as a reflective layer by a sputtering method, as shown in FIG. A laminate of ZnS reflective layer (R3) / transparent uneven print layer ((P19) / polycarbonate film (F3) / transparent double-sided tape (T1) / glass plate (G1) having the above was obtained. When viewed from the side of the glass plate (G1), the appearance like a sculpted facetted glass was obtained and the designability was high, and the obtained laminate was to the laminate obtained in Example 19 The reflection along the transparent uneven print layer was intensified, the stereoscopic vision was emphasized, and the designability was high.
[Example 22]
A laminate of a transparent relief print layer (P19) / polycarbonate film (F3) was obtained in the same manner as in Example 19. Next, ZnS (refractive index: 2.3) is deposited to a thickness of 50 nm as a reflective layer on the transparent concavo-convex printed layer (P19) by sputtering method, ZnS reflective layer (R3) / transparent concavo-convex printed layer ((P19) Next, on the surface of the polycarbonate film (F3) of this laminate opposite to the surface on which the transparent asperity print layer (P19) was formed, a transparent asperity print layer (in plan view) Print a blue color print decoration layer (P3) in a region where P19) is not formed using a UV printer, and use ZnS reflective layer (R3) / transparent concavo-convex print layer ((P19) / polycarbonate film (F3) / Next, a laminate of the color print decoration layer (P3) was obtained, and then, the glass plate (G1) was prevented from entering the air with the transparent double-sided tape (T1) on the color print decoration layer (P3) of this laminate. Stick to In addition, the ZnS reflective layer (R3) / the transparent concavo-convex printing layer (P19) / polycarbonate film (F3) / the color printing decorative layer (P3) / the transparent double-sided tape (T1) having a laminated structure as shown in FIG. When the obtained laminate is viewed from the side of the glass plate (G1), it looks like a faceted glass in which the surface is engraved on a colored glass, and the designability is obtained. it was high.
[Example 23]
A ZnS reflective layer (R3) / a transparent concavo-convex printed layer ((P19) / polycarbonate film (F3) / a color print decorative layer (P3) was obtained by the same method as in Example 22. Next, this ZnS reflective layer (R3) A transparent double-sided tape (T1) on top of the glass plate (G1) so as to prevent air from entering, and having a laminated structure as shown in FIG. 20, glass plate (G1) / transparent double-sided tape (T1) / A laminate of ZnS reflective layer (R3) / transparent uneven print layer (P19) / polycarbonate film (F3) / color print decoration layer (P3) was obtained, and the obtained laminate was observed from the glass plate (G1) side. When it did, the appearance like a faceted glass with the colored layer which put engraving on colored glass was obtained, and the designability was high.
[Example 24]
In the region on the other side of the transparent concavo-convex printing layer (P19) of the laminate obtained in Example 19 on the side opposite to the side with the polycarbonate film (F3), in the region where the transparent concavo-convex printing layer (P19) is not formed in plan view Color printing decoration layer (P3) / transparent concavo-convex printing layer (P19) / polycarbonate film having a laminated structure as shown in FIG. 21 in which a blue color printing decoration layer (P3) is printed using a UV printer A laminate of (F3) / transparent double-sided tape (T1) / glass plate (G1) was obtained. When the obtained laminate was viewed from the glass plate (G1) side, an appearance like a facet glass with a colored layer obtained by engraving a glass whose surface was colored was obtained, and the designability was high.
[Example 25]
On the color print decoration layer (P3) of the laminate obtained in Example 24, 50 nm thick ZnS (refractive index: 2.3) was formed as a reflective layer by sputtering, and lamination as shown in FIG. A laminate of ZnS reflective layer (R3) / color print decoration layer (P3) / transparent uneven print layer (P19) / polycarbonate film (F3) / transparent double-sided tape (T1) / glass plate (G1) having a structure Obtained. When the obtained laminate was viewed from the glass plate (G1) side, an appearance like a facet glass with a colored layer obtained by engraving a glass whose surface was colored was obtained, and the designability was high. Moreover, with respect to the laminate obtained in Example 24, in the laminate obtained, the reflection along the transparent concavo-convex printed layer was strong, the stereoscopic vision was emphasized, and the designability was high.
本発明の積層体は、窓材、床材、壁材、天井材等の建築部材;テーブル天板等のインテリア部材;洗濯機、冷蔵庫等の白物家電の外装材;携帯電話、携帯情報端末(PDA)等の電子機器等の用途に好ましく利用できる。
なお、2018年1月12日に出願された日本特許出願2018-3177号および2018年7月27日に出願された日本特許出願2018-141344号の明細書、特許請求の範囲、図面、及び要約書の全内容をここに引用し、本発明の明細書の開示として、取り入れるものである。 The laminate of the present invention is a building member such as a window material, a floor material, a wall material, a ceiling material, an interior member such as a table top, an exterior material of white goods such as a washing machine and a refrigerator, a mobile phone, a portable information terminal It can be preferably used for applications such as electronic devices such as (PDA).
The specification, claims, drawings and abstract of Japanese Patent Application No. 2018-3177 filed on Jan. 12, 2018 and Japanese Patent Application No. 2018-141344 filed on July 27, 2018. The entire contents of the document are incorporated herein by reference and incorporated as a disclosure of the specification of the present invention.
なお、2018年1月12日に出願された日本特許出願2018-3177号および2018年7月27日に出願された日本特許出願2018-141344号の明細書、特許請求の範囲、図面、及び要約書の全内容をここに引用し、本発明の明細書の開示として、取り入れるものである。 The laminate of the present invention is a building member such as a window material, a floor material, a wall material, a ceiling material, an interior member such as a table top, an exterior material of white goods such as a washing machine and a refrigerator, a mobile phone, a portable information terminal It can be preferably used for applications such as electronic devices such as (PDA).
The specification, claims, drawings and abstract of Japanese Patent Application No. 2018-3177 filed on Jan. 12, 2018 and Japanese Patent Application No. 2018-141344 filed on July 27, 2018. The entire contents of the document are incorporated herein by reference and incorporated as a disclosure of the specification of the present invention.
1A~1H:積層体、11:透光性基材、12:透光性部材、20:凹凸層、21:凸部、21A~21C:曲部の極点、30:反射層、40、41:加飾層、50:透光性樹脂膜、BP:曲部、CP:接続部、LP1:第1の直線部、LP2:第2の直線部
1A to 1H: laminate, 11: translucent substrate, 12: translucent member, 20: uneven layer, 21: convex portion, 21A to 21C: pole of curved portion, 30: reflective layer, 40, 41: Decorative layer, 50: translucent resin film, BP: curved portion, CP: connection portion, LP1: first straight portion, LP2: second straight portion
Claims (20)
- 透光性基材と表面に複数の平面視ライン状の凸部を有する凹凸層とを含む積層体であって、
前記凹凸層は平面視にて、曲げ角度が30~150°である曲部を有するライン状の前記凸部が間隔を空けて複数形成されたパターンを有し、かつ
前記凸部の線幅(L)に対する前記複数の凸部の間隔(S)の比(S/L)が10以下であることを特徴とする積層体。 A laminate comprising: a translucent base material; and a concavo-convex layer having a plurality of convex portions in the form of lines in a plan view on the surface,
The concavo-convex layer has a pattern in which a plurality of linear convex parts having a curved part with a bending angle of 30 to 150 ° are formed with a space between them in a plan view, and a line width of the convex parts ( A laminate characterized in that the ratio (S / L) of the spacing (S) of the plurality of convex portions to L) is 10 or less. - 前記凸部は、平面視にて、前記曲部を介してなめらかに接続された第1の方向に向かう第1の直線部と第2の方向に向かう第2の直線部とを含む、請求項1に記載の積層体。 The convex portion includes a first linear portion extending in a first direction smoothly connected via the curved portion and a second linear portion extending in a second direction in plan view. The laminated body as described in 1.
- 前記曲部の曲率半径に対する前記第1の直線部または前記第2の直線部の長さの比が150以下である、請求項2に記載の積層体。 The layered product according to claim 2 whose ratio of the length of said 1st straight part or said 2nd straight part to the curvature radius of said curving part is 150 or less.
- 前記凸部の線幅(L)に対する前記複数の凸部の間隔(S)の比(S/L)が3以下であり、かつ
前記曲部の曲率半径に対する前記第1の直線部または前記第2の直線部の長さの比が0.1~50であり、
前記曲部の曲げ角度が50~130°である、請求項2または3に記載の積層体。 The ratio (S / L) of the spacing (S) of the plurality of protrusions to the line width (L) of the protrusions is 3 or less, and the first straight portion or the first straight portion to the radius of curvature of the curved portion The ratio of the length of the straight part of 2 is 0.1 to 50,
The laminate according to claim 2 or 3, wherein a bending angle of the curved portion is 50 to 130 °. - 前記凸部は、平面視にて、複数の前記曲部を有し、かつ
前記曲部の曲率半径(R)に対する互いに隣り合う前記曲部の極点間の距離(D)の比(D/R)が150以下である、請求項1~4のいずれか1項に記載の積層体。 The convex portion has a plurality of the curved portions in plan view, and a ratio (D / R) of a distance (D) between poles of the adjacent curved portions to a radius of curvature (R) of the curved portion. The laminate according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein) is 150 or less. - 前記凹凸層の表面凹凸に沿って形成された反射層をさらに有する、請求項1~5のいずれか1項に記載の積層体。 The laminate according to any one of claims 1 to 5, further comprising a reflective layer formed along the surface asperities of the asperity layer.
- 前記反射層は、前記凹凸層との屈折率差が0.4以上の高屈折率材料および/または金属を含む、請求項6に記載の積層体。 The laminate according to claim 6, wherein the reflective layer comprises a high refractive index material and / or a metal having a refractive index difference of 0.4 or more with the uneven layer.
- 前記反射層は、AlおよびAgからなる群より選ばれる少なくとも1種の金属、および/または、TiO2、Nb2O5、およびZnOからなる群より選ばれる少なくとも1種の高屈折率材料を含む、請求項7に記載の積層体。 The reflective layer includes at least one metal selected from the group consisting of Al and Ag, and / or at least one high refractive index material selected from the group consisting of TiO 2 , Nb 2 O 5 , and ZnO. The laminated body of Claim 7.
- 前記透光性基材と前記凹凸層との間の屈折率差が0.3以内である、請求項1~8のいずれか1項に記載の積層体。 The laminate according to any one of claims 1 to 8, wherein the difference in refractive index between the light transmitting substrate and the uneven layer is within 0.3.
- 前記透光性基材はガラス板または透光性樹脂フィルムである、請求項1~9のいずれか1項に記載の積層体。 The laminate according to any one of claims 1 to 9, wherein the translucent substrate is a glass plate or a translucent resin film.
- 前記凹凸層は樹脂を含む、請求項1~10のいずれか1項に記載の積層体。 The laminate according to any one of claims 1 to 10, wherein the uneven layer comprises a resin.
- 前記凹凸層は平面視にて、間隔を空けて複数形成された前記凸部の前記曲部が直線状に連なった凸部群を含む、請求項2に記載の積層体。 The layered product according to claim 2 in which said concavo-convex layer contains a convex part group which said curved part of said convex part formed in multiple numbers at intervals in planar view continued in a straight line shape.
- 前記凹凸層は平面視にて、1つの中心部から互いに重なり合わずに複数の径方向に延びる複数の前記凸部群を含み、
互いに隣り合う第1の凸部群と第2の凸部群に着目し、
前記第1の凸部群において、間隔を空けて複数形成された前記凸部の前記曲部が連なる方向を第1の直線方向とし、
前記第2の凸部群において、間隔を空けて複数形成された前記凸部の前記曲部が連なる方向を第2の直線方向とし、
前記第1の直線方向と前記第2の直線方向とのなす角をθとしたとき、
θが10~170°であり、かつ
前記第1の凸部群と前記第2の凸部群との境界線が、前記第1の直線方向と前記第2の直線方向との交点から延びる前記第1の直線方向と前記第2の直線方向との二等分線または当該二等分線から±θ/4の範囲内の角度の直線に対して平行である、請求項12に記載の積層体。 The uneven layer includes a plurality of convex groups extending in a plurality of radial directions without overlapping with each other from one central portion in plan view,
Focus on the first convex group and the second convex group adjacent to each other,
In the first group of convex portions, a direction in which the curved portions of the plurality of convex portions formed at intervals are continuous is defined as a first linear direction.
In the second group of convex portions, a direction in which the curved portions of the plurality of convex portions formed at intervals are continuous is defined as a second linear direction.
When an angle between the first linear direction and the second linear direction is θ,
θ is 10 to 170 °, and the boundary between the first convex group and the second convex group extends from the intersection of the first linear direction and the second linear direction. The lamination according to claim 12, which is parallel to a bisector of a first linear direction and said second linear direction or a straight line of an angle within ± θ / 4 from said bisector. body. - θが45~135°である、請求項13に記載の積層体。 The laminate according to claim 13, wherein θ is 45 to 135 °.
- 前記凸部の末端部は平面視にて、曲げ角度が105~165°の曲部である、請求項1~14のいずれか1項に記載の積層体。 The laminate according to any one of claims 1 to 14, wherein the end of the convex portion is a bent portion having a bending angle of 105 to 165 ° in a plan view.
- 前記凸部の線幅(L)と前記複数の凸部の間隔(S)との和(L+S)が5~200μmである、請求項1~15のいずれか1項に記載の積層体。 The laminate according to any one of claims 1 to 15, wherein a sum (L + S) of a line width (L) of the convex portion and an interval (S) of the plurality of convex portions is 5 to 200 μm.
- 前記凸部の線幅(L)と前記複数の凸部の間隔(S)との和(L+S)が5~80μmである請求項1~16のいずれか1項に記載の積層体。 The laminate according to any one of claims 1 to 16, wherein a sum (L + S) of the line width (L) of the convex portion and the interval (S) of the plural convex portions is 5 to 80 μm.
- 加飾層をさらに含む、請求項1~17のいずれか1項に記載の積層体。 The laminate according to any one of claims 1 to 17, further comprising a decorative layer.
- 前記透光性基材と前記凹凸層との間に前記加飾層を有する、請求項18に記載の積層体。 The laminated body of Claim 18 which has the said decoration layer between the said translucent base material and the said uneven | corrugated layer.
- 平面視において、前記加飾層は前記凹凸層が形成されていない領域に形成される、請求項18または19のいずれか1項に記載の積層体。 The layered product according to any one of claims 18 or 19 in which said decoration layer is formed in a field in which said concavo-convex layer is not formed in plane view.
Priority Applications (1)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
JP2019564764A JP7173050B2 (en) | 2018-01-12 | 2019-01-11 | laminate |
Applications Claiming Priority (4)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
JP2018-003177 | 2018-01-12 | ||
JP2018003177 | 2018-01-12 | ||
JP2018-141344 | 2018-07-27 | ||
JP2018141344 | 2018-07-27 |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
WO2019139136A1 true WO2019139136A1 (en) | 2019-07-18 |
Family
ID=67219133
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/JP2019/000745 WO2019139136A1 (en) | 2018-01-12 | 2019-01-11 | Laminated body |
Country Status (2)
Country | Link |
---|---|
JP (1) | JP7173050B2 (en) |
WO (1) | WO2019139136A1 (en) |
Cited By (1)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
WO2021085084A1 (en) * | 2019-10-29 | 2021-05-06 | Agc株式会社 | Uneven structural body and layered body |
Citations (5)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JPH06210816A (en) * | 1993-01-20 | 1994-08-02 | Dainippon Printing Co Ltd | Decorative sheet for molding having irregularity pattern and mirror luster and patterned molded product |
JP2008018631A (en) * | 2006-07-13 | 2008-01-31 | Yoshida Seisakusho:Kk | Brilliantly shining decorative body and its manufacturing method |
JP2010208212A (en) * | 2009-03-11 | 2010-09-24 | Dainippon Printing Co Ltd | Decorative sheet and laminated board using the same |
JP2014065232A (en) * | 2012-09-26 | 2014-04-17 | Dainippon Printing Co Ltd | Laminate on which three-dimensionally and visually recognizable image is formed, and vessel including the laminate |
JP2015120328A (en) * | 2013-11-22 | 2015-07-02 | 内藤プロセス株式会社 | Changing image printed matter |
-
2019
- 2019-01-11 JP JP2019564764A patent/JP7173050B2/en active Active
- 2019-01-11 WO PCT/JP2019/000745 patent/WO2019139136A1/en active Application Filing
Patent Citations (5)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JPH06210816A (en) * | 1993-01-20 | 1994-08-02 | Dainippon Printing Co Ltd | Decorative sheet for molding having irregularity pattern and mirror luster and patterned molded product |
JP2008018631A (en) * | 2006-07-13 | 2008-01-31 | Yoshida Seisakusho:Kk | Brilliantly shining decorative body and its manufacturing method |
JP2010208212A (en) * | 2009-03-11 | 2010-09-24 | Dainippon Printing Co Ltd | Decorative sheet and laminated board using the same |
JP2014065232A (en) * | 2012-09-26 | 2014-04-17 | Dainippon Printing Co Ltd | Laminate on which three-dimensionally and visually recognizable image is formed, and vessel including the laminate |
JP2015120328A (en) * | 2013-11-22 | 2015-07-02 | 内藤プロセス株式会社 | Changing image printed matter |
Cited By (2)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
WO2021085084A1 (en) * | 2019-10-29 | 2021-05-06 | Agc株式会社 | Uneven structural body and layered body |
JPWO2021085084A1 (en) * | 2019-10-29 | 2021-05-06 |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
JPWO2019139136A1 (en) | 2021-01-07 |
JP7173050B2 (en) | 2022-11-16 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
KR101145009B1 (en) | Protection panel for electronic apparatus display window and production method for protection panel | |
WO2013080618A1 (en) | Optical element, window material, fitting, solar shading device, and building | |
CN112888974A (en) | Color developing structure | |
CA2612681A1 (en) | Multiple reflection panel | |
WO2018221326A1 (en) | Laminate and method for manufacturing same | |
KR101534337B1 (en) | Anti-glare firm and method for manufacturing the same | |
WO2019139136A1 (en) | Laminated body | |
EP1107025A3 (en) | Transparent laminate and plasma display panel filter utilizing same | |
WO2020015631A1 (en) | Texture protective film, terminal and manufacture method of texture protective film | |
WO2021187301A1 (en) | Multilayer body | |
CN109274786B (en) | Outward appearance piece, lid and battery pack behind cell-phone | |
JP2010085508A (en) | Display body with decorative pattern and method of manufacturing the same | |
JP2006159667A (en) | Decorative object | |
KR102481123B1 (en) | Decoration sheet with shadow effect and preparation method thereof | |
CN113805421A (en) | Projection screen and projection arrangement can curl | |
CN107813550A (en) | Curved surface stepped construction, its manufacture method and curved surface electronic installation | |
JP6357361B2 (en) | Retroreflector and stereoscopic image display device using the same | |
WO2021085084A1 (en) | Uneven structural body and layered body | |
US7567318B2 (en) | Reflector and liquid crystal display panel | |
JP3222486U (en) | Privacy film | |
WO2020213465A1 (en) | Multilayer body | |
JP2020121544A (en) | Uneven structure, method for manufacturing the same, and laminate | |
CN209787223U (en) | Decorative film and terminal | |
CN218577223U (en) | Decorative panel and refrigerator | |
CN111163943A (en) | Method for manufacturing sheet member and sheet member |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 19738283 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
ENP | Entry into the national phase |
Ref document number: 2019564764 Country of ref document: JP Kind code of ref document: A |
|
NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |
|
122 | Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase |
Ref document number: 19738283 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |